BUCANIERS OF AMERICA.  
The Second Volume.  
CONTAINING The Dangerous Voyage and Bold Attempts of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others; performed upon the Coasts of the South Sea, for the space of two years, etc.  
From the Original Journal of the said Voyage.  
WRITTEN By Mr. BASIL RINGROSE, Gent. Who was all along present at those Transactions.  
LONDON: Printed for William Crook, at the Sign of the Green Dragon without Temple-bar. 1685.   

THE PREFACE TO THE READER.  
THE general Applause wherewith the History of the Bucaniers hath been rececived, could have no other effects, than easily to persuade the Pulisher of that Piece, to undertake the Second Volume thereof. Especially considering that the same points which deserved the Credit and Commendation of the first, did seem to subsist for the like esteem and reception of the second. These were the fidelity of the Relations both here and there published, the Authors having been not only Eye-witnesses, but also Actors in the transactions they report: the candour and sincerity of the Style; the variety and pleasantness of these Voyages, the greatness of the Attempts here related, the unparallelled, and undaunted Courage of the Bucaniers, the strangeness of their performances, the novelty of their Exploits; and withal, the glory and grandeur of Valour, which here is seen to be inherent to our English Nation, and as pregnant of great Actions in the present, as in the former Ages. Unto which points may be added, in this Second Volume, for its recommendation, the grand discovery of a new passage into the South-Sea, beyond the straits of Ferdinando de Magallanes and le More, through an open and in no-wise dangerous Ocean, without those formidable perils both from Rocks, Currents, and Shoals, which hitherto have rendered the two passages aforementioned, altogether unaccessible to Trading; a Navigation performed by Captain Sharp and his Companions, many degrees beyond what Sir Francis Drake, Jacob le Maire, Noord, or Magallanes himself, who first Circumnavigated the World, ever reached unto in their Sailing. This Discovery alone, as hugely beneficial to Mankind, so may it seem sufficient of itself to recommend this present piece unto the public, even as extremely necessary to all such as Navigate the Ocean; and no less delightful unto those persons whose Studies are directed to the search of Nature, to the Arts of Mathematic or Navigation. Besides which point, both of Art, Curiosity, and Usefulness, we have given unto us here, by Mr. Ringrose, an exact account of many places in the South Sea; the very Draughts and Maps of many Ports, Islands, Bays, Gulfs, Points, and Coasts, hitherto unknown to the greatest part of Europe; their appearance at Sea; their soundings, landing, and bearings; together with what variety of Winds and Weather, of Currents and Calms, and other Observations the Bucaniers experimented in those parts. All which things, as they manifest unto us the inquisitiveness of the Author, so ought we highly to applaud his Curiosity and Genius, who all along the course of this Voyage, not only fought with his Sword in the most desperate Engagements and Battles of the Bucaniers against the Spaniards, but with his Pen gave us a true account of those Transactions; and with his Pencil hath delineated unto us the very Scenes of those Tragedies. Thus we find him totally employed towards our information and instruction at home, while he endured the greatest fatigues and hardship abroad: at the same time making Quadrants at Sea, that others sat idle and murmuring upon the Decks; at the same time shipwrackt, and almost naked, and starving upon a desert Island, and yet describing, even more exactly than the Spaniards themselves, the Gulf of Ballona, otherwise called of San Miguel, where he was cast away. These things, I say, as they are not undeserving of the highest praise and commendation in this ingenious Gentleman Mr. Ringrose their Author, so shall the Curioso's of Nature and Posterity itself be his eternal debtors for their acquaintance with these writings.  
Some imperfect account of these transactions, both short and in many things defective, I gave the last year unto the public, at the end of the second Impression of the History of the Bucaniers. But such as that Relation was, I had no better then to give; neither had I then seen the present Journal of Mr. Ringrose; and that same account being received from the hands of some of the Bucaniers themselves at Wapping, it was esteemed fit, both by me and others, to be published at that time. But as the Author of those Papers mistrusting both his own memory and sufficiency, remitteth himself in that Narrative unto the Journal of Mr. Ringrose, and desireth by this alone to be corrected, or supplied either in what he was mistaken or deficient; so now this Diary being published, I hope I have vindicated myself from any fault in History, having brought these papers to light, by which those others were beforehand both acknowledged and desired to be amended.  
As to any other Journal of this Voyage, I shall not concern myself in the least with their veracity, nor meddle with their Relations; knowing, that if any other person did take it, that no person in the Voyage was so able as Mr. Ringrose. Yet I know that divers Narratives, in many points differing from one another, have at several times been made public of one and the same Battle, one and the same Siege, Voyage, Journey, or other transaction. And indeed all humane Affairs, wheresoever reported by several persons, though all were present at the same times and places of their circumvolution, are necessarily subject to some diversity in the rehearsal; one person observing, omitting, contracting, dilating, understanding, or mistaking, one particular point or part of any transaction more than another.  
Having premised thus much, I shall here only declare, that what here is asserted, shall be supported by Mr. Ringrose himself, when ever he returneth into England; yea, and owned for truth by Captain Bartholomew Sharp, as the chiefest actor in these Affairs, assoon as he cometh home again: and if any other person can show unto the World any Journal of the same Voyage more complete, more exact, more elaborate, more curious, and informing, than Mr. Ringrose hath done, he shall deserve the Laurel for me.  
The case being thus stated concerning the present Narrative or Journal, I hope no person for the future will asperse or misconstrue the sincerity of my Intentions, in relation to the public. This I speak under that due resentment I ought to have, for being traduced, the last year, by some persons, who being transported with too much passion and partiality, would have no body else to be an admirer of the person and valorous Actions of Sir Henry Morgan, or the rest of the Bucaniers, but themselves. As if to publish a Translation of the unparallelled Exploits of that Jamaican Hero; to give him this commendable title; to say, that both he and his Companions had acted beyond mortal men in America; to compare them to Alexander, Julius Caesar, and the Nine Worthies of Fame; to propose them unto our English Nation, as the truest patterns of undaunted and exemplary Courage, that ever it produced, were to disparage the Conduct of Sir Henry Morgan and his Companions; as if all this were intended only to diminish the glory of his Actions, and eclipse the splendour of his and their valorous Triumphs. Methinks, if Envy reacheth thus far, with the same reason, or unjust measure, those persons may say, that to publish this present Journal, is to divulge nothing else than a satire against Captain Sharp; and that Mr. Ringrose who everywhere admireth his Conduct, and extolleth his Actions unto the Sky's, yea and was present himself, and concerned in the same Affairs, did mean nothing else than to traduce both his own and Captain Sharps name, as infamous unto Posterity. For my part, I judge myself so far distant from blemishing in the least, or disparaging Sir Henry Morgan, or his Heroic Actions; that I believe I have showed myself to be the greatest admirer of his personal Valour, and Conduct: yea, I think that I have done more, towards the advantage, both of the Honour, and Credit of that great Commander, by soliciting and publishing that Translation, than all the Authors of our English Nation besides. And I could unfeignedly wish, that these persons who pretend to be so passionate for Sir Henry Morgan, and his huge Deserts, as to Misinterpret the sincere respects and service, I have endeavoured to perform unto his Merits, would outdo what I have already done in this particular, and give us either a more full, exact, and true account of his Exploits, or the best Panegyric of his Prowess, that ever was Written; and then experiment whether I did not readily embrace the Printing such a thing at my own cost and charge, and rather render them ten thousand thanks for his Commendations, than carp at their Actions for Penning, or Printing the 〈◊〉.  
●or what if the French or Dutch Author 〈◊〉 the History of the Bucaniers, did mistake himself in two or three points, relating to Sir Henry Morgan? Must, therefore the Publisher be blamed for faithfully Printing, what was most faithfully Translated? Must the Saddle be set upon the wrong Horse, and the faults of the Author, be imputed unto the Printer? Thus if Mr. Ringrose should happen to commit any mistake in these present Papers, that blame should be presently mine; and happy should be all Authors, if so readily their errors could be discharged upon the Publishers. Besides, what Authors can there be found so accurate in all things, as not to be subject now and then to some little lapses of their Pen? Were it so in John Esquemeling; as he ought to be pardoned for any small peccadillo not wittingly nor willingly committed, concerning what he relateth of Sir Henry Morgan, so am I hitherto persuaded, that he never designed to offend that great person, or falsely traduce his memory, in the least. My Argument is: because he himself had the hand of a private Bucanier in those Affairs, he himself was a Sharer in those Bootys, an Actor in those Erterprises, and could no more blame Sir Henry Morgan for leading unto those Attempts, than blemish himself for following unto them. Another Reason, even more prevalent, is, that he all along speaketh more honourably of Sir Henry Morgan, than of any other Commander of the Bucaniers, though they were his own Countrymen, either Francis Lolonois, or Roche Brasiliano, whereof the one was a Dutch man, and the other was born in France. So that to say, that he representeth the English Bucaniers, as the worst of men, is plainly to forget, that he relateth ten times greater villainies of his own Nation and Country People; and that the partiality they accuse him of, if any such can be found in that Author, is rather bend against the French and other Nations, than the English. Doth he in any place of his History, lay all the faults and cruelties of the English Bucaniers upon Sir Henry Morgan? Or do we believe that if committed without order, as in most Arms many things are so done, the General or Commander in Chief, aught to be accountable for them? Or if those things were performed by order, that the Spaniards had not deserved them at the hands of the Bucaniers?  
Ay, but he mistaketh the Pedigree of Sir Henry Morgan. Truly, a great fault, and unpardonable in John Esquemeling, a Foreigner to our Nation, and an illiterate Bucanier, that he should not be better read in our English History. So did he also mistake his very name, calling him Captain John Morgan, for Henry; but that that fault was rectified in the Translation. As if every private Soldier ought to be thoroughly acquainted with the Christian name of his General, and know whether he was Baptised John, or Thomas, Richard, or William! Now what dishonour can it be reputed, unto the merits of Sir Henry Morgan to be misrepresented by John Esquemeling, for the Son of a Rich Yeoman in Wales, whenas at the same time he saith, that he was of good quality in that Country, even as most who bear that name in Wales are known to be? Doth not all our English Nation know the Family of the Morgan's to be one of the Ancientest, and best Qualified in all Wales, or England; and that to be descended of a rich Yeoman of the same Family, is as great an hounour, and as honourable a Pedigree, as any private Gentleman needeth to pretend unto?  
But then Sir Henry Morgan did not burn Panama. And what disgrace were it, to that worthy person, if he had set fire unto it, for those reasons he knew best himself? Certainly no greater dishonour than to take and plunder the said City. Thus are these persons so far transported with passion towards Sir Henry Morgan, as to bereave him of the glory of his greatest Actions, whether true or false. For whether he fired the Town or not, (for that Question I shall not make mine) this I am sure, that it was constantly so reported, and believed here in England, viz. that the English had set fire unto it; that unto this day the Bucaniers do believe it to be so; and consequence unto this belief Mr. Ringrose, in these Papers saith plainly in some place or other, that Panama was once burnt by Sir Henry Morgan; that the Spaniards themselves never believed nor reported this Fact otherwise, neither will they easily be persuaded to the contrary unto this very day, as I am credibly informed by those persons who lived in Spain at the same time that the news of the taking of Panama was brought into Spain, and who have been resident there for these many years since. For what concerneth, what is now Published, that the Governor of Panama fired the Town himself, is rather believed by the Spaniards to be a shame of the Governors making, thereby to save his own Bacon, against whom they rail as the greatest Coward that ever was, for deserting the Town, and flying to the Mountains, at the approach of the English. How then, say they, could he fire it himself, or give orders to have it fired, when we know he was upon the Spur, thirty or forty Miles distant from thence? Had he done it, he would have set fire unto every House, before he had left the Town, and not so many Hours after the English were in possession of the place, and he at such a distance from it. Thus both the English Nation, and the Spanish having agreed, to give the honour of this Action either truly or falsely, unto Sir Henry Morgan, I cannot but admire that those who pretend to be the greatest admirers of his merits, should endeavour to divest him of it.  
What concerneth two or three points more, relating to Sir Henry Morgan in the History of the Bucaniers, I shall not undertake to Apologise for John Esquemeling, in case he hath misrepresented them. All that I shall say, is this, that that worthy person is not the first General or Chief Commander, whose Actions have been misconstrued or misunderstood by the common Soldiers, and consequently ill represented by them at home. Neither is any thing in this World more subject to glosses, and false representations, than the Heroic Actions of great men, by their Servants, or inferiors. If this be the case of John Esquemeling, and that he was Malcontented which his Fortune at Panama, what is that to me? What fault was that of mine? I'th' mean while, why have not these persons, so zealous of the honour of Sir Henry Morgan, given us the true Journal of his huge Exploits, but rather suffer his famous Actions to lie dormient for so many years in England, at the same time that other Nations have Pubshed them abroad? And then why must I be blamed by these persons, his admirers, for doing for the renown of Sir Henry Morgan what I could, if I could not do so much, as I would willingly have done?   

READER, Correct these two places thus▪  
PAge 1. Line 21. for plundered once, read taken once. p. 33. l. 14. blot out, by him.   

BUCANIERS OF AMERICA. The Second Volume. PART IU.  
Containing the dangerous Voyage, and bold Assaults of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others, performed in the South Sea, for the space of two years, etc.  

CHAP. I. Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp, and others, set forth in a Fleet towards the Province of Darien, upon the Continent of America. Their designs to pillage and plunder in those parts. Number of their Ships, and strength of their Forces by Sea and Land.  
AT a place called Boca del Toro, 
The place where they met together.  was the general Rendezvouz of the Fleet, which lately had taken and sacked Puerto Velo the second time; that rich place having been plundered once before, under the Conduct of Sir Henry Morgan, as is related in the History of the Bucaniers. At this place also were two other Vessels; the one belonging unto Captain Peter Harris, and the other unto Captain Richard Sawkins; both Englishmen and Privateers. Here therefore a report was made unto the Fleet, of a Peace concluded between the Spaniards and the Indians of the Land of Darien, who for the most part wage incessant Wars against one another. Also, that since the conclusion of the said Peace, they had been already tried, and found very faithful unto Captain Bournano, a French Commander, in an attempt on a certain place called Chepo, nigh the South Sea. Further, that the Indians had promised to conduct him unto a great and very rich place, named Tocamora: upon which he had likewise promised them to return in three months' time with more Ships and Men. Hereupon we all agreed to go visit the said place, and thus dispersed ourselves into several Coves, 
They 〈◊〉 for Tocamora.  (by the Spaniards called Cúèvas, or hollow creeks under the Coasts) there to careen and fit our Vessels for that purpose. In this place Boca del Toro, we found plenty of fat Tortoises; the pleasantest meat in the world. When we had refitted our Vessels, we met at an Island, called by us, the Water-key; and this was then our strength, as followeth.  
 Tuns. Guns. Men. Captain Coxon in a Ship of 80 8 97 Captain Harris in another of 150 25 107 Captain Bournáno 90 6 86 Captain Sawkins 16 1 35 Captain Sharp 25 2 40 Captain Cook 35 00 43 Captain Alleston 18 00 24 Captain Row 20 00 25 Captain Macket 14 00 20  

●hey set sail and 〈◊〉 at the Zamblas.  We sailed from thence March the 23. 1679. and in our way touched at the Islands called Zamblas'. These are certain Islands reaching eight Leagues in extent, and lying fourteen Leagues Westward of the River of Darien. Being here at an Anchor, many of the Indians, both men and women, came to see us. Some brought Plantans, others other Fruits, and Venison, to exchange with us for Beads, Needles, Knives, or any trifling bauble whereof they stand in need. But what they most chief covet are Axes and Hatchets to sell Timber withal. The men here go naked, 
Habit of the Indians of those Isles.  as having only a sharp and hollow tip, made either of Gold, Silver, or Bark, into which they thrust their Privy Members; the which tip they fasten with a string about their middle. They wear as an ornament in their Noses, a golden or silver Plate, in shape like unto a Half Moon; which when they drink, they hold up with one hand, mean while they lift the cup with the other. They paint themselves sometimes with streaks of black; as the women do in like manner, with red. These have in their Noses a pretty thick ring of Gold or Silver; and for clothing, they cover themselves with a Blanket. They are generally well featured women: among whom I saw several fairer than the fairest of Europe, with Hair like unto the finest flax. Of these it is reported, they can see far better in the dark, than in the light.  
These Indians misliked our design for Tocamora, 
They change their design of Tocamora for another.  and dissuaded us from it, asserting it would prove too tedious a march, and the way so mountainous, and uninhabited, that it would be extreme difficult to get Provisions for our men. Withal, they proffered to guide us undiscryed, within few Leagues of the City of Panama, in case we were pleased to go thither; where we could not choose but know ourselves, we should not fail of making a good Voyage. Upon these, and other reasons which they gave us, we concluded to desist from the Journey of Tocamora, and to proceed to Panama. Having taken up these Resolutions, Captain Bournano and Captain Row's Vessels separated from us, as being all French, and not willing to go to Panama, they declaring themselves generally against a long march by Land. Thus we left them at the Zamblas. From thence an Indian Captain, or chief Commander, 
They go to the Golden Island  named Andraeas, conducted us to another Island, called by the English, the Golden Island▪ situated something to the westward of the mouth of the great River of Darien. At this Island we met, being in all seven Sail, on the third of April, 1680.  
Here at the Golden Island, the Indians gave us notice of a Town called Sancta Maria, 
〈◊〉 set forth for Sancta Maria.  situate on a great River, which beareth the same name, and which runneth into the South Sea, by the Gulf of San Miguèl. That in the Town was kept a Garrison of four hundred Soldiers; and that from this place much Gold was carried to Panama, which was gathered from the Mountains thereabouts. That in case we should not find sufficient purchase there, we might from thence proceed by Sea to Panama, where we could not easily fail of our designs. This motion of the Indians we liked so well, 
 that we landed three hundred and thirty one men, on April the 5th 1680. leaving Captain Alleston, and Mackett, with a party of Seamen, to guard our Ships in our absence; with which we intended to return home.  

Their Provision and Colours  These men that were landed, had each of them three or four Cakes of Bread, (called by the English Dough-boy's) for their provision of Victuals; and as for drink, the Rivers afforded them enough. At that time of our Landing, Captain Sharp was very faint and weak, as having had a great ●it of sickness lately, which he had scarcely recovered. Our several Companies that marched, were distinguished as followeth. First, Captain Bartholomew Sharp with his Company had a red Flag, with a bunch of white and green Ribbons. The second Division led by Captain Richard Sawkins, with his men had a red Flag striped with yellow. The third and fourth, which were led by Captain Peter Harris, had two green Flags, his Company being divided into two several Divisions. The fifth and sixth, which being led by Captain John Coxon, who had some of Alleston's and Macketts men joined unto his, made two Divisions or Companies, had each of them a red Flag. The seventh was led by Captain Edmond Cook with red Colours striped with yellow, with a Hand and Sword for his devise. All, or most of them, were Armed with Fuzee, Pistol, and Hanger.   

CHAP. II. They march towards the Town of Santa Maria with design to take it. The Indian King of Darien meeteth them by the way. Difficulties of this March, with other occurrences till they arrive at the place.  
BEing landed on the Coast of Darien, 
First days march.  and divided into Companies, as was mentioned in the preceding Chapter, we began our march towards Santa Maria, the Indians serving us for guides in that unknown Country. Thus we marched at first through a small skirt of a wood, and then over a bay almost a League in length. After that, we went two Leagues directly up a woody valley, where we saw here and there an old Plantation, and had a very good path to march in. There we came to the side of a River, which in most places was dry, and built us Houses, or rather Huts to lodge in.  
Unto this place came unto us another Indian, 
An Indian Commander joineth them.  who was a chief Commander, and a man of great parts, named Captain Antonio. This Indian Officer encouraged us very much to undertake the Journey of Santa Maria, and promised to be our Leader; saying, he would go along with us now, but that his Child lay very sick. However, he was assured, it would die by next day; and then he would most certainly follow and overtake us. Withal, he desired we would not lie in the grass, for fear of monstrous Adders, which are very frequent in those places. Breaking some of the stones that lay in the River, we found them shine with sparks of Gold. These stones are driven down from the neighbouring Mountains in time of floods. 
Four of their number return back.  This day four of our men tired, and returned back unto the Ships. So we remained in all 327 men, with six Indians to conduct us. That night some showers of rain fell.  

 The next day of our march we mounted a very steep hill, and on the other side, at the foot thereof, we rested on the bank of a River, which Captain Andraeas told us, did run into the South Sea; being the same River on which the Town of Santa Maria was situated. Hence we continued our march until noon, and then ascended another Mountain extremely higher than the former. Here we ran much danger oftentimes, and in many places, the Mountain being so perpendicular, and the path so narrow, that but one man at a time could pass. We arrived by the dark of the evening to the other side of the Mountain, and lodged again by the side of the same River, having marched that day, according to our reckoning, about eighteen miles. This night likewise some rain did fall.  

 The next morning, being April the 7th, we marched all along the River aforementioned, crossing it often, almost at every half mile, sometimes up to the knees, and at other times up to the middle, in a very swift current. About noon we came to a place, where we found some Indian houses. Th●se were very large and neat: the sides were built wi●h Cabbage-trees, and the roofs of wild Canes, being, over them, 
〈…〉 Darien  thatched with Palmito Royal, but far more neater than ●urs at Jamaica. They had many divisions into rooms, though no ascent by stairss into Chambers. At this place were four of these houses together, that is, within a stones throw one of another, each of them having a large Plantain walk before it. At the distance of half a mile from this place, lived the King or chief Captain of these Indians of Darien, who came to visit us in Royal Robes, with his Queen and Family. 
 His Crown was made of small white 〈◊〉▪ which were curiously woven, having no other top than its lining, which was red silk. Round about the middle of it was a thin plate of gold, more than two inches broad, 
 la●ed behind; from whence did stick two or three Ostrich feathers. About this pla●e went also a row of golden beads, which were bigger than ordinary pease; underneath which the red lining of the Crown was seen. In his nose he wore a large plate of gold, in form of an half Moon; and in each ear a great golden ring, nigh four inches in diameter, with a round thin plate of Gold of the same breadth, having a small hole in the centre, and by that hanging to the ring. He was covered with a thin white cotton robe, reaching unto the small of his legs, and round its bottom a fringe of the same three inches deep. So that by the length of this Robe, our sight was impeded, that we could see no higher than his naked Ankles. In his hand he had a long bright Lance, as sharp as any knife. With him he had three Sons, each of them having a white Robe, and their Lances in their hands, but standing bareheaded before him; as also were eight or nine persons more of his Retinue, or Guard. His Queen wore a red Blanket, 
Attire of the Queen.  which was closely girt about her waist: and another that came loosely over her head and shoulders, like unto our old fashion striped hang. She had a young Child in her arms, and two Daughters walked by her, both Marriageable, with their faces almost covered with stripes or streaks of red, and about their Neck and Arms, almost loaden with small Beads of several colours. These Indian women of the Province of Darien, are generally very free, airy, and brisk; yet withal very modest, and cautious in their Husband's presence, of whose jealousy they stand in fear. With these Indians we made an exchange, or had a truck, as it is called, for Knives, Pins, Needles, or any other such like trifles; but in our dealing with them we found them to be very cunning. Here we rested ourselves for the space of one day; and withal, chose Captain Sawkins to lead the Forlorn, unto whom, for that purpose, we gave the choice of Fourscore men. The King ordered us each man to have three Plantans, with Sugarcanes to suck, by way of a Present. But when these were consumed, if we would not truck we must have starved; for the King himself did not refuse to deal for his Plantans. This sort of Fruit is first reduced to mash, then laid between leaves of the same tree, and so used with water; after which preparation they call it Miscelaw.  

Fourth days march.  On April the Ninth we continued our march along the banks of the River abovementioned, finding in our way here and there a House. The owners of the said Houses would most commonly stand at the door, and give, as we passed by, to every one of us, either a ripe Plantain, or some sweet Cazave-root. Some of them would count us by dropping a grain of Corn for each man that passed before them; for they know no greater number, nor can tell no farther than Twenty. That night we arrived at three great Indian Houses, where we took up our Lodgings, the weather being clear and serene all night.  

 The next day Captain Sharp, Captain Coxon, and Captain Cook, with about threescore and ten of our men, embarked themselves in fourteen Canoas' upon the River, to glide down the stream. Among this number I did also embark; and we had in our company our Indian Captain Andraeas, of whom mention was made above; and two Indians more in each Canoa, to Pilot or guide us down the River. But if it was so that we were tired in travelling by Land before, certainly we were in a worse condition now in our Canoas'. For at the distance of almost every stones cast, we were constrained to quit, and get out of our Boats, and hale them over either Sands or Rocks: at other times over Trees that lay cross and filled up the River, so that they hindered our Navigation; yea, several times over the very points of Land itself. That night we built ourselves Huts to shelter in upon the River side, and rested our wearied Limbs until next morning.  

 This being come, we prosecuted our Journey all day long with the same fatigue and toil, as we had done the day before. At night came a Tiger and looked on us for some while, but we dared not to fire at the Animal, fearing we should be descried by the sound of our Fuzees: the Spaniards, as we were told, not being at much distance from that place.  
But the next day, which was April the Twelfth, 
Seventh day● march.  our pain and labour was rather doubled than diminished; not only for the difficulties of the way, which was intolerable, but chief for the absence of our main body of men, from whom we had parted the day before. For now hearing no news of them, we grew extremely jealous of the Indians and their Counsels, suspecting it a design of those people thus to divide our Forces, and then cutting us off, betray us unto the Spaniards our implacable Enemies. That night we rested ourselves by building of Huts, as we had done, and hath been mentioned before.  
On Tuesday morning, the next ensuing day, 
Eighth days march.  we continued our Navigation down the River, and arrived at a beachy point of Land; at which place another Arm joineth the same River. Here, as we understood, the Indians of Darien did usually Rendezvous, whensoever they drew up in a Body, with intention to fight their ancient Enemies the Spaniards. Here also we made a halt, or stayed for the rest of our Forces and Company, the Indians having now sent to seek them, as being themselves not a little concerned at our dissatisfaction and jealousies. In the afternoon our Companions came up with us, and were hugely glad to see us, they having been in no less fear for us, than we had been at the same time for them. We continued and rested there that night also, with design to fit our Arms for action, which now, as we were told, was nigh at hand.  
We departed from thence early the next morning, 
Ninth days march.  which was the last day of our march, being in all now, the number of threescore and eight canoas, wherein were embarked 327 of us Englishmen, and 50 Indians, who served us for Guides. Unto the point abovementioned, the Indians had hitherto guided our Canoas' with long Poles or sticks; but now we made ourselves Oars and Paddles to row withal, and thereby make what speed we could. Thus we rowed with all hast imaginable, and upon the River happened to meet two or three Indian Canoas' that were laded with Plantans. 
They arrive at Santa Maria.  About midnight we arrived and landed at the distance of half a mile, more or less, from the Town of Santa Maria, whither our march was all along intended. The place where we landed was deeply muddy, insomuch, that we were constrained to lay our paddles on the mud to wade upon, and withal, lift ourselves up by the boughs of the trees, to support our Bodies from sinking. Afterwards we were forced to cut our way through the woods for some space, where we took up our Lodgings for that night, for fear of being discovered by the Enemy, unto whom we were so nigh.   

CHAP. III. They take the Town of Santa Maria with no loss of Men, and but small purchase of what they sought for. Description of the Place, Country, and River adjacent. They resolve to go and plunder the second time the City of Panama.  
THe next morning, which was Thursday April the Fifteenth, 
〈…〉 the Town and Fort.  about break of day, we heard from the Town a small Arm discharged, and after that a Drum beating a travailler. With this we were roused from our sleep, and taking up our Arms, we put ourselves in order and marched towards the Town. As soon as we came out of the Woods into the open ground, we were descried by the Spaniards, who had received beforehand intelligence of our coming, and were prepared to receive us, having already conveyed away all their Treasure of Gold, and sent it to Panama. They ran immediately into a large Palizada Fort, having each Pale or Post twelve foot high, and began to fire very briskly at us as we came. But our Vanguard ran up unto the place, and pulling down two or three of their Palizadas, 
They take the place.  entered the Fort incontinently, and made themselves Masters thereof. In this Action there were not fifty of our men that came up before the Fort was taken; and on our side only two were wounded, and not one killed. Notwithstanding within the place were found two hundred and threescore men, besides which number, two hundred others were said to be absent, being gone up into the Country unto the Mines to fetch down Gold, or rather to convey away what was already in the Town. This golden Treasure cometh down another branch of this River unto Santa Maria, from the neighbouring Mountains, where are thought to be the richest Mines of the Indies, or, at least, of all these parts of the Western World. Of the Spaniards we killed in the assault twenty six, and wounded to the number of sixteen more. But their Governor, their Priest, and all, or most of their chief men, made their escape by flight.  
Having taken the Fort, 
Description of the Town.  we expected to find here a considerable Town belonging unto it. But it proved to be only some wild houses made of Cane, the place being chief a Garrison designed to keep the Indians in subjection, who bore a mortal hatred, and are often apt to rebel against the Spaniards. But as bad a place as it was, our fortune was much worse. For we came only three days too late, or else we had met with three hundred weight of Gold, 
They miss of their designs.  which was carried thence to Panama in a Bark, that is sent from thence twice or thrice every year, to fetch what Gold is brought to Santa Maria from the Mountains. This River, called by the name of the Town, is hereabouts twice as broad as the River of Thames is at London, and floweth above threescore miles upwards, rising to the height of two fathom and a half at the Town itself. As soon as we had taken the place, the Indians who belonged to our company, and had served us for Guides, came up unto the Town. For mean while they heard the noise of the Guns, they were in a great consternation, and dared not approach the Palizadas, but had hidden themselves closely in a small hollow ground, insomuch that the bullets, while we were fight flew over their heads.  

 Here we found and redeemed the eldest Daughter of the King of Darien, of whom we made mention above. She had, as it should seem, been forced away from her Father's house by one of the Garrison, (which Rape had hugely incensed him against the Spaniards) and was with Child by him. After the Fight the Indians destroyed as many more of the Spaniards, as we had done in the assault, by taking them into the adjoining Woods, and there stabbing them to death with their Lances. But so soon as we understood this their barbarous cruelty, we hindered them from taking any more out of the Fort, where we confined them every one Prisoners. Captain Sawkins with a small party of ten more, 
 put himself into a Canoa, and went down the River, to pursue and stop, if it were possible, those that had escaped, who were the chiefest of the Town and Garrison. But now our great expectations of making an huge purchase of Gold at this place being totally vanished, we were unwilling to come so far for nothing, or go back empty-handed; especially, considering what vast riches were to be had at no great distance from thence. Hereupon, we resolved to go for Panama, which place if we could take, we were assured we should get Treasure enough, to satisfy our hungry appetite of Gold and Riches, that City being the receptacle of all the Plate, Jewels, and Gold that is digged out of the Mines of all Potost and Peru. Unto this effect therefore, and to please the humours of some of our company, we made choice of Captain Coxon to be our General, or Commander in chief. 
 Before our departure, we sent back what small booty we had taken here by some prisoners, and these under the charge of twelve of our men to convey it unto the Ships.  

〈◊〉 Panama.  Thus we prepared to go forward on that dangerous enterprise of Panama. But the Indians who had conducted us having gotten from us what Knives, Sizars, Axes, Needles, and Beads they could obtain, would not stay any longer, but all, or the greatest part of them returned to their home. 
 Which notwithstanding, the King himself, Captain Andraeas, Captain Antonio, the King's Son, 
The chiefest remain.  called by the Spaniards, Bonete de Oro, or King Golden-cap, as also his Kinsman, would not be persuaded by their falling off to leave us, but resolved to go to Panama, out of the desire they had to see that place taken and sacked. Yea, the King promised, if there should be occasion, to join fifty thousand men unto our Forces. Besides which promises, we had also another encouragement very considerable to undertake this journey. For the Spaniard who had forced away the King's Daughter, as was mentioned above, fearing lest we should leave him to the mercy of the Indians, who would have had but little on him, having showed themselves so cruel unto the rest of his Companions, for the safety of his life had promised to lead us, not only into the Town, but even to the very bedchamber door of the Governor of Panama, and that we should take him by the hand, and seize both him and the whole City, before we should be discovered by the Spaniards, either before or after our arrival.   

CHAP. IU. The Bucaniers leave the Town of Santa Maria, and proceed by Sea to take Panama. Extreme difficulties, with sundry accidents and dangers of that Voyage.  
HAving been in possession of the Town of Santa Maria, 
Their departure from Santa Maria.  only the space of two days, we departed from thence on Saturday April the 17th 1680. We embarked all in Thirty five Canoas', and a Periagua, which we had taken here lying at anchor before the Town. Thus we sailed, or rather rowed down the River, in quest of the South Sea, upon which Panama is seated, towards the Gulf of Belona, whereat we were to disembogue into that Ocean. Our prisoners, the Spaniards, begged very earnestly they might be permitted to go with us, and not be left abandoned unto the mercy of the Indians, who would show them no savour, and whose cruelty they so much feared. But we had much ado to find sufficient number of boats for ourselves, the Indians that left us, had taken with them, either by consent or stealth, so many Canoas'. Yet notwithstanding they found soon after either Bark Logs, or old Canoas', and by that means shifted so well for their lives, as to come along with us. Before our departure we burned both the Fort, 
〈◊〉 the 〈…〉.  the Church, and the Town, which was done at the request of the King, he being extremely incensed against it.  

Misfortunes of the Author.  Among these Canoas', it was my misfortune to have one that was very heavy, and consequently sluggish. By this means we were left behind the rest a little way, our number being only four men, besides myself, that were embarked therein. As the Tide fell, it left several shoals of sand naked; and hence, we not knowing of the true Channel, amongst such variety of streams, happened to steer within a shoal, above two mile, before we perceived our error. Hereupon, we were forced to lie by until high water came; for to row in such heavy boats as those are against the Tide, is a thing totally impossible. As soon as the Tide began to turn, we rowed away in prosecution of our Voyage, and withal, made what haste we could, but all our endeavours were in vain, for we neither could find, nor overtake our Companions. Thus about ten of the clock at night, the Tide being low water, we stuck up an Oar in the River, and slept by turns in our Canoa, several showers of rain falling all the night long, with which we were throughly pierced to the skin.  
But the next morning, no sooner day was come, when we rowed away down the River, 
 as before, in pursuit of our people. Having gone about the space of two Leagues, we were so fortunate as to overtake them. For they had lain that night at an Indian Hut, or Embarcadero, that is to say, landing place, and had been filling of water till then i'th' morning. Being arrived at the place, they told us, that we must not omit to fill our Jars there with water, otherwise we should meet with none in the space of six days time. Hereupon we went every one of us the distance of a quarter of a mile from the Embarcadero, unto a little Pond, to fill our water in Calabazas, making withal what hast we could back unto our Canoa. But when we returned, we found not one of our men, they all being departed, and already got out of sight. Such is the procedure of these wild men, that they care not in the least whom they lose of their company, or leave behind. We were now more troubled in our minds than before, fearing lest we should fall into the same misfortune we had so lately overcome.  
Hereupon we rowed after them, as fast as we possibly could, but all in vain. For here are found such huge numbers of Islands, greater and lesser, as also Keys about the mouth of the River, that it was not difficult for us, who were unacquainted with the River, to lose ourselves a second time amongst them. Yet notwithstanding, though with much trouble and toil, we found at last that mouth of the River, that is called by the Spaniards, Boca chica, or the Little mouth. But as it happened, it was now young flood, and the stream ran very violent against us. So that though we were not above a stones cast, from the said mouth, and this was within a League broad, yet we could not by any means come near it. Hence we were forced to put ashore, which we did accordingly, until the time of high-water. We haled our Canoa close by the bushes, and when we got out, we fastened our Rope unto a Tree, which the Tide had almost covered, for it floweth here nigh four fathom deep.  
As soon as the Tide began to turn, we rowed away from thence unto an Island, 
He is in great dangers in the Gulf.  distant about a League and an half from the mouth of the River, in the Gulf of San Miguel. Here in the Gulf it went very hard with us, whensoever any wave dashed against the sides of our Canoa, for it was nigh twenty foot in length, and yet not quite one foot and a half in breadth where it was at the broadest. So that we had just room enough to sit down in her, and a little water would easily have both filled and overwhelmed us. At the Island aforesaid, we took up our resting place for that night, though for the loss of our company, and the great dangers we were in, the sorrowfullest night that until then, I ever experimented in my whole life. For it reigned impetuously all night long, insomuch that we were wet from head to foot, and had not one dry thread about us; neither through the violence of the rain, were we able to keep any fire burning wherewith to warm or dry us. The Tide ebbeth here a good half mile from the mark of high water, and leaveth bare wonderful high, and sharp pointed rocks. We passed this heavy and tedious night without one sole minute of sleep, being all very sorrowful to see ourselves so far and remote from the rest of our companions, as also totally destitute of all humane comfort. For a vast Sea surrounded us on the one side, and the mighty power of our Enemies the Spaniards on the other. Neither could we descry at any hand the least thing to relieve us, all that we could see being the wide sea, high Mountains and Rocks; mean while ourselves were confined to an Eggshell, instead of a Boat, without so much as a few clothes to defend us from the injuries of the weather. For at that time none of us had a shoe to our feet. We searched the whole Key, to see if we could find any water, but found none.   

CHAP. V Shipwreck of Mr. Ringrose the Author of this Narrative. He is taken by the Spaniards, and miraculously by them preserved. Several other accidents and disasters which befell him after the loss of his Companions till he found them again. Description of the Gulf of Vallona.  
ON Monday April the Nineteenth, at break of day, we halled our Canoa into the water again, 
They put out to Sea again in the Canoa.  and departing from the Island aforementioned: both wet and cold, as we were, we rowed away towards the Punta de San Lorenzo, or Point St. Laurence. In our way we met with several Islands which lie straggling thereabouts. But now we were again so hard put to it, by the smallness of our vessel, and being in an open sea, that it was become the work of one man, yea sometimes of two, to cast out the water, which came in on all sides of our Canoa. After struggling for some while with these difficulties, as we came near unto one of those Islands, a Sea came and overturned our Boat, 
And are cast away.  by which means we were all forced to swim for our lives. But we soon got unto the Shoar, and to the same place our Canoa came tumbling after us. Our Arms were very fast lashed unto the inside of the Boat, and our Locks as well cased and waxed down as was possible; so were also our Catouche Boxes and powder-horns. But all our Bread and fresh water was utterly spoiled and lost.  
Our Canoa being tumbled on shore by the force of the waves, our first business was to take out and clear our Arms. 
Another shipwreck.  This we had scarcely done, but we saw another Canoa run the same misfortune at a little distance to Leeward of us, amongst a great number of Rocks that bounded the Island. The persons that were cast away proved to be six Spaniards of the Garrison of Santa Maria, who had found an old Canoa, and had followed us to escape the cruelty of the Indians. They presently came unto us, and made us a fire; which being done, we got our meat and broiled it on the coals, and all of us eat amicably together. But we stood in great need of water, or any other drink to our Victuals, not knowing in the least where to get any. Our Canoa was thrown up by the waves to the edge of the water, and there was no great fear of its splitting, as being full six inches in thickness on the sides thereof. But that in which the Spaniards came, split itself against the Rocks, as being old and slender, into an hundred pieces. Though we were thus shipwrackt and driven ashore, as I have related, yet otherwise, and at other times, is this Gulf of San Miguel a mere Millpond for smoothness of water.  
My company was now altogether for returning, and to proceed no farther, 
They consult about their affair.  but rather for living amongst the Indians, in case they could not reach the Ships we had left behind us in the Northern Sea. But with much ado I prevailed with them to go forward at least one day longer, and in case we found not our people the next day, that then I would be willing to do any thing which they should think fit. Thus we spent two or three hours of the day in consulting about our affairs, and withal keeping a man to watch and look out on all sides, for fear of any surprisal by the Indians, or other Enemies. About the time that we were come to a conclusion in our debates, our watchman by chance spied an Indian; who, as soon as he saw us, ran into the woods. I sent immediately two of my company after him, who overtook him, and found that he was one of our friendly Indians. Thus he carried them unto a place not far distant from thence, where seven more of his company were, with a great Canoa which they had brought with them. They came unto the place where I was with the rest of my company, and seemed to be glad to meet us on that Island. I asked them by signs for the main body of our Company; and they gave me to understand, that in case we would go with them in their Canoa, which was much bigger than ours, we should be up with the Party by the next morning. This news, as may easily be supposed, not a little rejoiced our hearts.  
Presently after this friendly invitation, 
The Author saveth the lives of the Spaniards.  they asked who the other six men were, whom they saw in our company, for they easily perceived us not to be all of one and the same coat and lingua. We told them they were Wankers, which is the name they commonly give unto the Spaniards in their own Language. Their next question was, if they should kill those Spaniards? but I answered them, No, by no means, I would not consent to have it done. With which answer they seemed to be satisfied for that present. But a little while after, my back being turned, my company thinking that they should oblige thereby the Indians, beckoned unto them to kill the Spaniards. With this, the poor Creatures perceiving the danger that threatened them, made a sad shriek and outcry, and I came time enough to save all their lives. But withal, I was forced to give way and consent, they should have one of them, for to make him their slave. Hereupon I gave the Canoa that I came in unto the five Spaniards remaining, and bid them get away and shift for their lives, lest those cruel Indians should not keep their word, and they run again the same danger they had so lately escaped. Having sent them away, mean while I rested myself, here I took a Survey of this Gulf, and the mouth of the River, the which I finished the same day, and do here present unto the view of the Reader.  
A Description of Laguna or Gulf of Ballona.  
But now, thanks be to God, 
They put to sea again, and are made prisoners.  joining company with those Indians, we were got into a very large Canoa, the which for its bigness, was better able to carry twenty men, than our own that we had brought to carry five. The Indians had also fitted a very good Sail unto the said Canoa; so that having now a fresh and strong gale of wind, we set sail from thence, and made therewith brave way, to the infinite joy and comfort of our hearts, seeing ourselves so well accommodated, and so happily rid of the miseries we but lately had endured. We had now a smooth and easy passage, after such tedious and laboursome pains as we had sustained in coming so far since we left Santa Maria. Under the point of St. Laurence, mentioned above, is a very great rippling of the Sea, occasioned by a strong current which runneth hereabouts, and which oftentimes almost filled our Boat with its dashes, as we sailed. This evening, after our departure from the Island where we were cast away, it reigned vehemently for several hours, and the night proved to be very dark. About nine of the clock that night we descried two fires on the shore of the Continent, over against us. These fires were no sooner perceived by the Indians of our Canoa, but they began to shout for joy, and cry out, Captain Antonio, Captain Andraeas, the names of their Indian Captains and Leaders; and to affirm, they were assured those fires were made by their Companions. Hence they made for the shore towards those fires, as fast as they could drive. But so soon as our Canoa came amongst the breakers, nigh the shore, out came from the Woods above threescore Spaniards with Clubs and other Arms, and laying hold on our Canoa on both sides thereof, halled it out of the water quite dry. So that by this means we were all suddenly taken and made their prisoners. I laid hold of my Gun, thinking to make some defence for myself, but all was in vain; for they as suddenly seized me between four or five of them, and hindered me from action. I'th' mean while our Indians leapt over board, and got away very nimbly into the Woods; my Companions standing amazed at what had happened, and the manner of our surprisal. I asked them presently if any of them could speak either French or English: but they answered, No. Hereupon, as well as I could, I discoursed to some of them, who were more intelligent than the rest, in Latin, and by degrees came to understand their condition. These were Spaniards who had been turned here ashore by our English party, who left them upon this Coast, left by carrying them nearer unto Panama, any of them should make their escape, and discover our march towards that City. They had me presently after I was taken into a small Hut which they had built, covered with boughs, and made there great shouts for joy, because they had taken us; designing in their minds to use us very severely for coming into those parts, and especially for taking and plundering their Town of Santa Maria. But mean while the Captain of those Spaniards was examining me, in came the poor Spaniard that was come along with us, and reported how kind I had been to him, and the rest of his Companions, by saving their Lives from the cruelty of the Indians.  

They ●re civilly treated and ●et at liberty.  The Captain having heard him, arose from his seat immediately and embraced me, saying, that we Englishmen were very friendly Enemies, and good people, but that the Indians were very Rogues, and a treacherous Nation. Withal, he desired me to sit down by him, and to eat part of such Victuals as our Companions had left them when they were turned ashore. Then he told me, that for the kindness I had showed unto his Countrymen, he gave us all our Lives and Liberties, which otherwise he would certainly have taken from us. And though he could scarcely be persuaded in his mind to spare the Indians lives, yet for my sake he did pardon them all, and I should have them with me, in case I could find them. Thus he bid me likewise take my Canoa, and go in God's name, saying withal, he wished us as fortunate as we were generous. Hereupon I took my leave of him, after some little stay, though he invited me to tarry all night with him. I searched out, and at last found my Indians, who for fear had hid themselves in the bushes adjoining to the neighbouring woods, where they lay concealed. Having found them, the Captain led me very civilly down unto the Canoa, and bidding my Companions and the Indians get in after me; as they at first halled us ashore, so now again they pushed us off to Sea, by a sudden and strange vicissitude of fortune. All that night it reigned very hard, as was mentioned above; neither durst we put any more ashore at any place, it being all along such, as by Mariners is commonly called an Iron Coast.  
The next morning being come, we sailed, and padled, 
They overtake the rest of the Fleet.  or rowed, till about ten of the clock. At which time we espied a Canoa making towards us with all speed imaginable. Being come up with us, and in view, it proved to be of our own English Company, who mistaking our Canoa for a Spanish Periagua, was coming in all haste to attack us. We were infinitely gladded to meet them, and they presently conducted us to the rest of our Company, who were at that instant coming from a deep Bay, which lay behind a high point of Rocks, where they had lain at Anchor all that night and morning. We were all mutually rejoiced to see one another again, they having given both me and my Companions for lost.   

CHAP. VI The Bucaniers prosecute their Voyage, till they come within sight of Panama. They take several Barks and Prisoners by the way. Are descried by the Spaniards before their arrival. They order the Indians to kill the Prisoners.  
FRom the place where we rejoined our English Forces, 
They arrive at Farol de Plantanoes.  we all made our way towards a high hammock of Land, as it appeared at a distance, but was nothing else then an Island seven Leagues distant from the Bay aforementioned. On the highest part of this Island the Spaniards keep a watch, or Look-out, (for so it is termed by the Seamen) for fear of Pirates, or other Enemies. That evening we arrived at the Island, and being landed, went up a very steep place, till we came to a little Hut where the watchman lodged. We took by surprisal the old man who watched in the place, but happened to see us not, till we were got into his Plantain walk before the Lodge. He told us in his examination, that we were not as yet descried by the Spaniards of Panama, or any others that he knew; which relation of the old fellow much encouraged us to go forwards with our design of surprising that rich City. This place, if I took its name rightly, is called Farol de Plantanoes, or in English, Plantane-watch.  

The Bucaniers take a Bark of Panama.  Here, not long before it was dark that evening, a certain Bark came to an anchor at the outward side of the Island, which instantly was descried by us. Hereupon, we speedily Manned out two Canoas', who went under the shore and surprised the said Boat. Having examined the persons that were on board, we found she had been absent the space of eight days from Panama, and had landed Soldiers at a point of Land not far distant from this Island, with intention to fight and curb certain Indians and Negro, who had done much hurt in the Country thereabouts. The Bark being taken, most of our men endeavoured to get into her, but more especially those who had the lesser Canoas'. Thus there embarked thereon to the number of one hundred thirty and seven of our company, together with that Sea-Artist, and valiant Commander, Captain Bartholomew Sharp. With him went also on board Captain Cook, whom we mentioned at the beginning of this History. The remaining part of that night we lay at the Key of the said Island, expecting to prosecute our Voyage the next day.  

They take another Bark.  Morning being come, I changed my Canoa and embarked myself on another, which though it was something lesser than the former, yet was furnished with better company. Departing from the Island, we rowed all day long over shoal water, at the distance of about a League from land, having sometimes not above four foot water, and white ground. In the afternoon we descried a Bark at sea, and instantly gave her chase. But the Canoa wherein was Captain Harris happened to come up the first with her, who after a sharp dispute took her. Being taken, we put on board the said Bark thirty men. But the wind would not suffer the other Bark in chasing to come up with us. This pursuit of the Vessel did so far hinder us in our Voyage, and divide us asunder, that night coming on presently after, we lost one another, and could no longer keep in a body together. Hereupon we laid our Canoa ashore, to take up our rest for that night, at the distance of two miles, more or less, from high water mark, and about four Leagues to Leeward of the Island of Chepillo, unto which place our course was then directed.  
The next morning, 
They arrive at the Isle of Chepillo.  as soon as the water began to float us, we rowed away for the forementioned Island Chepillo, where by assignation our general Rendezvous was to be. In our way as we went, we espied another Bark under sail, as we had done the day before. Capt. Coxons Canoa was now the first that came up with this vessel. But a young breeze freshning at that instant, she got away from him after the first onset, killing in the said Canoa one Mr. Bull, and wounding two others. We presently conjectured that this Bark would get before us unto Panama, and give intelligence of our coming unto those of the Town; all which happened as we had foreseen. It was that day two of the clock in the afternoon, before all our Canoas' could come together, and join one another as it was assigned at Chepillo. 
They take 1● prisoners.  We took at that Island fourteen prisoners, between Negroes and Mulatos; also great store of Plantans, and good water, together with two fat hogs. But now believing that ere this we had been already descried at Panama, by the Bark aforementioned, we resolved among ourselves to waste no time, but to hasten away from the said Island, to the intent we might at least be able to surprise and take their Shipping, and by that means make ourselves masters of those Seas, in case we could not get the Town, which now we judged almost impossible to be done. At Chepillo we took also a Periagua, which we found at anchor before the Island, 
 and presently we put some men on board her. Our stay here was only of few hours; so that about four of the clock in the evening, which now was coming on, we r●wed away from thence, designing to reach Panama before the next morning; unto which place we had now only seven Leagues to go, it being no farther distant from Chepillo. But before we departed from the said Island, it was judged convenient by our Commanders, for certain reasons, which I could not dive into, to rid their hands of the prisoners which we had taken. 
〈…〉 Indians t● 〈…〉.  And hereupon orders were given unto our Indians, who they knew would perform them very willingly, to fight, or rather to murder and slay the said Prisoners upon the shore, and that in the view of the whole Fleet. This they instantly went about to do, being glad of this opportunity to revenge their hatred against their enemies, though in cold blood. But the prisoners, although they had no Arms wherewith to defend themselves, forced their way through those barbarous Indians, in spite of their Lances, Bows, and Arrows, and got into the Woods of the Island, one only man of them being killed. We rowed all night long, though many showers of rain ceased not to fall.   

CHAP. VII. They arrive within sight of Panama. Are encountered by Three small men of War. They fight them with only sixty eight men, and utterly defeat them, taking two of the said Vessels. Description of that bloody fight. They take several Ships at the Isle of Perico before Panama.  
THe next morning, 
They come within sight of Panama.  which was on April the 23. 1680. that day being dedicated unto St. George, our Patron of England, we came before Sun-rise within view of the City of Panama, which maketh a pleasant show unto the Vessels that are at sea from off the shore. Soon after we saw also the Ships belonging to the said City, which lay at Anchor at an Island called Perico, distant only two Leagues from Panama. On the aforesaid Island are to be seen several Storehouses which are built there, to receive the Goods delivered out of the Ships. At that present there rid at Anchor at Perico five great ships, and three pretty big Barks, called Barcos de la Armadilla, or little men of War; the word Armadilla signifying a Little Fleet. 
Are descried by the Armadilla.  These had been suddenly Manned out, with design to fight us, and prevent any farther attempts we should make upon the City, or Coasts of those Seas. As soon as they espied us, they instantly weighed Anchor, and got under sail, coming directly to meet us, whom they expected very shortly, according to the intelligence they had received of our coming. Our two. Periaguas being heavy, could not row so fast as we that were in the Canoas', and hence we were got pretty far before them. In our five Canoas' (for so many we were now in company) we had only thirty six men, and these but in a very unfit condition to fight, as being tired with so much rowing, and so few in number, in comparison of the enemy that came against us. 
 They sailed towards us directly before the wind, insomuch that we feared lest they should run us down before it. Hereupon we rowed up into the winds eye, as the Seamen term it, and got close to windward of them. Mean while we were doing this, our lesser Periagua came up with us, in which were thirty two more of our Company. So that we were in all sixty eight men that were engaged in the fight of that day; 
 the King himself being one of our number, who was in the Periagua aforementioned. In the vessel that was Admiral of these three small men of war, were fourscore and six Biscayners, who have the repute of being the best Mariners, and also the best Soldiers amongst the Spaniards. 
 These were all Volunteers, who came designedly to show their Valour, under the Command of Don Jacinto de Barahona, who was High Admiral of those Seas. In the second were seventy seven Negroes, who were commanded by an old and stout Spaniard, Native of Andalusia in Spain, named Don Francisco de Peralta. In the third and last were sixty five Mestizoes, or Mulato's, or Tawnymores, Commanded by Don Diego de Carabaxal. So that in all they made the number of two hundred twenty & eight men. The Commanders had strict orders given them, and their resolutions were to give quarters to none of the Pirates or Bucaniers. But such bloody Commands as these seldom or never do happen to prosper.  
The Canoa of Captain Sawkins, and also that wherein I was, 
 were much to Leeward of the rest. So that the ship of Don Diego de Carabaxal came between us two, and fired presently on me to Windward, and on him to Leeward, wounding with these broad sides, four men in his Canoa, and one in that I was in. But he paid so dear for his passage between us, that he was not very quick in coming about again and making the same way. For we killed with our first volley of shot, several of his men dead upon the decks. Thus we also got to Windward, as the rest were before. At this time the Admiral of the Armadilla, or Little Fleet, came up with us suddenly, scarce giving us time to charge, and thinking to pass by us all with as little or less damage, as the first of his Ships had done. But as it happened, it fell out much worse with him, for we were so fortunate, as to kill the man at the Helm. So that his Ship ran into the wind, and her Sails lay a back, as is usually said in Marinery. By this means we had time to come all up under his stern, and firing continually into his Vessel, we killed as many as came to the Helm. Besides which slaughter, we cut asunder his main sheet and brace with our shot. At this time the third vessel, in which Captain Peralta was, was coming up to the aid of their General. Hereupon Captain Sawkins, who had changed his Canoa, and was gone into the Periagua, left the Admiral to us four Canoas', (for his own was quite disabled) and met the said Peralta. Between him & Captain Sawkins the dispute, or fight, was very hot, lying board on board together, and both giving and receiving death unto each other as fast as they could charge. In the mean while that we were thus engaged, the first ship tacked about, and came up to relieve the Admiral. But we perceiving that, and foreseeing how hard it would go with us, if we should be beaten from the Admiral's stern, determined to prevent his design. Hereupon two of our Canoas', to wit, Captain Springers and my own, stood off to meet him. He made up directly towards the Admiral, who stood upon the quarter deck, waving unto him with a Handkerchief so to do But we engaged him so closely, in the middle of his way, that had he not given us the Helm, 
One of them put to flight▪  and made away from us, we had certainly been on board him. We killed so many of the men, that the vessel had scarce men enough left alive, or unwounded, to carry her off. Yet the wind now blowing fresh, they made shift to get away from us, and hereby save their lives.  
The Vessel which was to relieve the Admiral being thus put to slight, we came about again upon the Admiral, 
They take the Admiral.  and all together gave a loud hollow, which was answered by our men in the Periagua, though at a distance from us. At that time we came so close under the stern of the Admiral, that we wedged up the Rudder; and withal, killed both the Admiral himself, and the chief Pilot of his ship; so that now they were almost quite disabled and disheartened likewise, 
The Admiral and chief Pilot killed.  seeing what a bloody Massacre we had made among them with our shot. Hereupon, two thirds of their men being killed, and many others wounded, they cried for Quarter, which had several times been offered unto them, and as stoutly denied until then. Captain Coxon entered on board the Admiral, and took with him Captain Harris, who had been shot through both his Legs, as he boldly adventured up along the side of the ship. 
 This vessel being thus taken, we put on board her also all the rest of our wounded men, and instantly manned two of our Canoas' to go and aid Captain Sawkins, who now had been three times beaten from on board Peralta, such valiant defence had he made. And indeed, to give our Enemies their due, no men in the world did ever act more bravely than these Spaniards.  

 Thus coming up close under Peralta's side, we gave him a full volley of shot, and expected to have the like return from him again. But on a sudden we saw his men blown up that were abast the Mast; some of them falling on the deck, and others into the Sea. This disaster was no sooner perceived by their valiant Captain Peralta, but he leapt over board, and in spite of all our shot, got several of them into the ship again; though he was much burnt in both his hands himself. But as one misfortune seldom cometh alone, mean while he was recovering these men to reinforce his ship withal, and renew the fight, another Jar of powder took fire forward, and blew up several others upon the Forecastle. Among this smoke, and under the opportunity thereof, Captain Sawkins laid them on board, and took the ship. Soon after they were taken, I went on board Captain Peralta, to see what condition they were in. And indeed, such a miserable sight I never saw in my life. For not one man there was found, but was either killed, desperately wounded, or horribly burnt with Powder. Insomuch, that their black skins were turned white in several places, the powder having torn it from their flesh and bones. Having compassionated their misery, 
Horrible spectacle of the wounded.  I went afterwards on board the Admiral, to observe likewise the condition of his Ship and men. Here I saw what did merely astonish me, and will scarcely be believed by others than ourselves who saw it. There were found on board this ship but twenty five men alive, whose number before the fight had been fourscore and six, as was said above. So that threescore and one, out of so small a number, were destroyed in the Battle. But what is more, of these twenty five men, only eight were able to bear Arms, all the rest being desperately wounded, and by their wounds totally disabled to make any resistance, or defend themselves. Their blood ran down the decks in whole streams, and not scarce one place in the ship was found that was free from blood.  
Having possessed ourselves of these two Armadilla vessels, or Little men of War, 
They take the Ships in the Harbour.  Captain Sawkins asked the prisoners, how many Men there might be on board the greatest ship that we could see from thence, lying in the Harbour of the Island of Perico abovementioned, as also in the others that were something smaller. Captain Peralta hearing these questions, dissuaded him as much as he could from attempting them; saying, that in the biggest alone there were Three hundred and fifty men, and that he would find the rest too well provided for defence against his small number. But one of his men, who lay a dying upon the deck, contradicted him as he was speaking, and told Captain Sawkins, there was not one man on board any of those ships that were in view; for they had all been taken out of them to fight us in these three vessels called the Armadilla, or Little Fleet. Unto this relation we gave credit, as proceeding from a dying man; and steering our course unto the Island, we went on board them, and found, as he had said, not one person there. The biggest ship of these, which was called La Santissima Trinidad, or the Blessed Trinity, they had set on fire, made a hole in her, and loosened her foresail. But we quenched the fire with all speed, and stopped the leak. This being done, we put our wounded men on board her, and thus constituted her for that present to be our Hospital.  

What men they lost in the ●ight.  Having surveyed our own loss and damages, we found that eighteen of our men had been killed in the fight, and twenty two were wounded. These three Captains against whom we fought, were esteemed by the Spaniards to be the valiantest in all the South Seas. Neither was this reputation undeservedly conferred upon them, as may easily be inferred from the relation we have given of this bloody Engagement. As the third ship was running away from the fight, she met with two more that were coming out to their assistance; but withal, gave them so little encouragement, that they returned back, and dared not engage us. We began the Fight about half an hour after Sun-rise, and by noon had finished the Battle, and quite overcome them. Capt. Peralta, mean while he was our Prisoner, would often break out into admirations of our Valour, and say, surely, We Englishmen were the valiantest men in the whole world, who designed always to fight open, whilst all other Nations invented all the ways imaginable to barricade themselves, and fight as close as they could. And yet notwithstanding, we killed more of our Enemies than they of us.  

Captain Harris dyeth.  Two days after our Engagement, we buried Captain Peter Harris, a brave and stout Soldier, and a valiant Englishman, born in the County of Kent; whose death we very much lamented. He died of the wounds he received in the Battle, and besides him, only one man more; all the rest of our wounded men recovered. Being now come before Panama, I here enquired of Don Francisco de Peralta, our Prisoner, many things concerning the state and condition of this City, and the Neighbouring Country; and he satisfied me in manner following.   

CHAP. VIII. Description of the State and Condition of Panama, and the parts adjacent. What Vessels they took while they blocked up the said Port. Captain Coxon with seventy more returneth home. Sawkins is chosen in chief.  
THe famous City of Panama is situate in the latitude of nine degrees North. It standeth in a deep Bay, 
Present state of Panama.  belonging to the South Sea. It is in form round, excepting only that part where it runs along the Seaside. Formerly it stood four miles more Easterly, when it was taken by Sir Henry Morgan, as is related in the History of the Bucaniers. But by him then being burnt, and three times more since that time by casualty, they removed it to the place where it now standeth. Yet notwithstanding, some poor people there are still inhabiting at the old Town, and the Cathedral Church is still kept there, the beautiful building whereof maketh a fair show at a distance, like unto that of St. Paul's at London. This new City, of which I now speak, is much bigger than the old one was, and is built for the most part of brick, the rest being built of stone, and tiled. As for the Churches belonging thereunto, they are not as yet finished. These are eight in number, whereof the chiefest is called Santa Maria. The extent of the City comprehendeth better than a mile and a half in length, and above a mile in breadth. The Houses for the most part are three stories in height. It is well walled round about, with two Gates belonging thereunto, excepting only where a Creek cometh into the City, the which at high-water letteth in Barks, to furnish the Inhabitants with all sorts of Provisions and other Necessaries. Here are always Three hundred of the King's Soldiers to Garrison the City; besides which number, their Militia of all colours, are one thousand one hundred. But at the time that we arrived there, most of their Soldiers were out of Town; insomuch, that our coming put the rest into great consternation, they having had but one night's notice of our being in those Seas▪ Hence we were induced to believe, that had we gone ashore, instead of fight their ships, we had certainly rendered ourselves masters of the place; especially considering, that all their chief men were on board the Admiral; I mean, such as were undoubtedly the best Soldiers. Round about the City, for the space of seven Leagues, more or less, all the adjacent Country is Savana, as they call it in the Spanish Language, that is to say, plain and level ground, as smooth as a sheet; for this is the signification of the word Savana. Only here and there is to be seen a small spot of woody Land; and every where this level ground is full of Vacadas, or Beef Stantions, where whole droves of Cows and Oxen are kept, which serve as well as so many Look-outs, or Watch-Towers, to descry if an Enemy is approaching by land. The ground whereon the City standeth, is very damp and moist, which rendereth the place but of bad repute for the concern of health. The water is also very full of worms, and these are much prejudicial to shipping; which is the cause that the King's Ships lie always at Lima, the Capital City of Peru, unless when they come down to Panama to bring the King's Plate; which is only at such times, as the Fleet of Galeones cometh from Old Spain to fetch and convey it thither. Here in one night after our arrival, we found Worms of three quarters of an inch in length, both in our Bed-cloaths and other Apparel.  

Number of 〈…〉 Panama.  At the Island of Perico abovementioned, we seized in all five ships. Of these, the first and biggest was named, as was said before, the Trinidad, and was a great ship, of the burden of four hundred Tuns. 
 Her lading consisted of Wine, Sugar, Sweetmeats, (whereof the Spaniards in those hot Countries make infinite use) Skins, and Soap. The second ship was of about Three hundred Tuns burden, and not above half laded with bars of Iron, which is one of the richest Commodities that are brought into the South Sea. This vessel we burned with the lading in her, because the Spaniards pretended not to want that Commodity, and therefore would not redeem it. The third was laden with Sugar, being of the burden of one hundred and fourscore Tuns, more or less. This vessel was given to be under the Command of Captain Cook. The fourth was an old ship of sixty Tuns burden, which was laden with slower of Meal. This ship we likewise burnt with her lading; esteeming both bottom and Cargo, at that time, to be useless unto us. The fifth was a ship of Fifty Tuns, the which, with a Periagua, Captain Coxon took along with him when he left us.  
Within two or three days after our arrival at Panama, 
Captain Coxon mutineth, and returneth home.  Captain Coxon being much dissatisfied with some reflections which had been made upon him by our company, determined to leave us, and return back to our ships in the Northern Seas, by the same way he came thither. Unto this effect, he persuaded several of our company, who sided most with him, and had had the chiefest hand in his Election, to fall off from us, and bear him company in his journey, or march over-land. The main cause of those reflections, was the backwardness in the last Engagement with the Armadilla; concerning which point, some sticked not to defame, or brand him, with the note of Cowardice. He drew off with him, to the number of threescore and ten of our men, who all returned back with him in the Ship and Periagua abovementioned, towards the mouth of the River of Santa Maria. In his company also went back the Indian King, Captain Antonio, and Don Andraeas, who being old, desired to be excused from staying any longer with us. However, the King desired we would not be less vigorous in annoying their enemy and ours, the Spaniards, than if he were personally present with us. And to the intent we might see how faithfully he did intent to deal with us, he at the same time recommended both his Son and Nephew unto the care of Captain Sawkins▪ 
Captain Sawkins ch●sen.  who was now our newly chosen General, or Commander in chief, in the absence of Captain Sharp. The two Armadilla Ships which we took in the Engagement we burned also, saving no other thing of them both, but their Rigging▪ and Sails With them also we burned a small Bark, which came into the Port laden with Fowls and Poultry▪  
On Sunday, whi●h was April the 25th, Captain Sharp with his Bark and Company came in and joined us again. 
 H●s absence was occasioned by want of water, which forced him to bear up to the King's Islands. Being there, he found a new Bark, 
〈◊〉 taken.  which he presently took, and burned his old one. This vessel did sail excellently well. Within a day or two after the arrival of Captain Sharp, came in likewise the people of Captain Harris, who were still absent. These had also taken another Bark, 
〈◊〉 Bark taken.  and cut down the Masts of their old one by the board, and thus without Masts or Sails turned away the Prisoners they had taken in her. The next day we took in like manner another Bark, 
A third Bark taken.  which arrived from Nata, being laden with Fowls, as before. In this Bark we turned away all the meanest of the Prisoners we had on board us.  

They go to the Isl. of Tavoga.  Having continued before Panama for the space of ten days, being employed in the affairs aforementioned, on May the second we weighed from the Island of Perico, and stood off to another Island, distant two Leagues farther from thence, called Tavoga. On this Island standeth a Town which beareth the same name, and consisteth of a hundred houses, more or less. The people of the Town were all fled, seeing our vessels to arrive. Mean while we were here, some of our men being drunk on shore, happened to set ●ire unto one of the Houses, the which consumed twelve houses more before any could get ashore to quench it. Unto this Island came several Spanish Merchants from Panama, and sold us what Commodities we needed, buying also of us much of the goods we had taken in their own vessels. They gave us likewise two hundred pieces of Eight for each Negro we could spare them of such as were our prisoners. From this Island we could easily see all the Vessels that went out, or came into the Port of Panama; and here we took likewise several Barks that were laden with Fowls.  
Eight days after our arrival at Tavoga, we took a ship that was coming from Truxillo, and bound for Panama. 
A good Prize taken.  In this vessel we found two thousand Jars of Wine, fifty Jars of Gunpowder, and fifty one thousand pieces of Eight. This money had been sent from that City, to pay the Soldiers belonging to the Garrison of Panama. From the said Prize we had information given us, that there was another ship coming from Lima with one hundred thousand pieces of Eight more; which ship was to sail ten or twelve days after them, and which they said could not be long before she arrived at Panama. Within two days after this intelligence, 
Another Pri●e.  we took also another ship laden with Flower from Truxillo, belonging unto certain Indians, Inhabitants of the same place, or thereabouts. This Prize confirmed what the first had told us of that rich ship, and said, as the others had done before, that she would be there in the space of eight or ten days.  
Mean while we lay at Tavoga, the Precedent, that is to say, the Governor of Panama, 
A message from the Precedent of Panama.  sent a Message by some Merchants unto us, to know what we came for into those parts? Unto this Message Captain Sawkins made answer, That we came to assist the King of Darien, who was the true Lord of Panama, and all the Country thereabouts. 
The answer unto it.  And that since we were come so far, it was no reason but that we should have some satisfaction. So that if he pleased to send us five hundred pieces of Eight for each man, and one thousand for each Commander, and not any farther to annoy the Indians, but suffer them to use their own power and liberty, as became the true and natural Lords of the Country, that then we would desist from all farther Hostilities, and go away peaceably; otherwise that we should stay there, and get what we could, causing unto them what damage was possible. By the Merchants also that went and came to Panama, we understood, there lived then us Bishop of Panama, one who had been formerly Bishop of Santa Martha, and who was Prisoner unto Captain Sawkins, when he took the said place about four or five years past. The Captain having received this intelligence, sent two loaves of Sugar unto the Bishop as a present. On the next day the Merchant who carried them, returning to Tavoga, brought unto the Captain a golden ring for a retaliation of said present. And withal, he brought a message to Captain Sawkins from the Precedent abovementioned, to know farther of him, since we were Englishmen, from whom we had our Commission, and to whom he ought to complain for the damages we had already done them? Unto this Message Captain Sawkins sent back for an answer, That as yet all his company were not come together; but that when they were come up we would come and visit him at Panama, and bring our Commissions on the muzzles of our Guns, at which time he should read them as plain as the flame of Gunpowder could make them.  

〈◊〉 go to the 〈◊〉 of Otoque.  At this Island of Tavoga, Captain Sawkins would said have stayed longer, to wait for the rich Ship abovementioned, that was coming from Peru; but our men were so importunate for fresh Victuals, that no reason could rule them, nor their own interest persuade them to any thing that might conduce unto this purpose. Hereupon, on May the 15th we weighed Anchor, and sailed from thence unto the Island of Otoque. Being arrived there, we lay by it, mean while our Boat went ashore, and fetched off Fowls, and Hogs, and other things necessary for sustenance. Here at Otoque I finished a draught, comprehending from point Garachine, unto the Bay of Panama, etc. Of this I may dare to affirm, that it is in general more correct and true, than any the Spaniards have themselves. For which cause I have here inserted it, for the satisfaction of those that are curious in such things.  
From Otoque we sailed to the Island of Cayboa, 
And thence to Cayboa.  which is a place very famous for the fishery of Pearl thereabouts; and is at the distance of eight Leagues from another place called Puebla Nueba, on the Main. In our way to this Island, we lost two of our Barks, the one whereof had fifteen men in her, and the other seven. Being arrived, we cast anchor at the said Island.  
The Bay of Panama and Gulf of Ballona   

CHAP. IX. Captain Sawkins, chief Commander of the Bucaniers, is killed before Puebla Nueba. They are repulsed from the said place. Captain Sharp chosen to be their Leader. Many more of their company leave them, and return home over land.  
MEan while we lay at Anchor before Cayboa, 
They land on the Continent.  our two chiefest Commanders, Captain Sawkins and Captain Sharp, taking with them to the number of threescore men, more or less, went in the Ship of Captain Cook unto the mouth of the River where Puebla Nueba is situated. The day of this action, as I find it quoted in my Journal, was May 22. 1680. When they came unto the River's mouth, they put themselves into Canoas', and were piloted up the River towards the Town by a Negro, who was one of our Prisoners. I was chosen to be concerned in this action, but happened not to land, being commanded to remain in Captain Cooks ship, while they went up to assault the Town. But here at Puebla Nueba, the Inhabitants were too well provided for the reception of our party. For at the distance of a mile below the Town, they had cut down great Trees, and laid them cross the River, with design to hinder the ascent of any Boats. In like manner on shore before the Town itself, they had raised three strong breast-works, and made other things for their defence. Here therefore Captain Sawkins running up to the breast-works, at the head of a few men, was killed; a man who was as valiant and courageous as any could be, 
Captain Sawkins killed.  and likewise next unto Captain Sharp, the best beloved of all our company, or the most part thereof. Neither was this love undeserved by him; for we ought justly to attribute unto him the greatest honour we gained in our Engagement before Panama, with the Spanish Armadilla, or Little Fleet. Especially, considering that as hath been said above, Captain Sharp was by accident absent at the time of that great and bloody fight.  
We that remained behind on board the Ship of Captain Cook, 
Some accounted of the River of Puebla Nueba.  carried her within the mouth of the River of Puebla Nueba, and entered close by the East shore, which here is crowned with a round hill. Here within two stones cast of shore, we had four fathom water. Within the Point openeth a very fine and large River, which falleth from a sandy Bay, at a small distance from thence. But as we were getting in, being strangers unto the place, we unwittingly ran our ship on ground, nigh unto a Rock which lieth on the westward shore: for the true Channel of the said River is nearer to the East than West shore. With Captain Sawkins, in the unfortunate assault of this place, there died two men more, and three were wounded in the Retreat, which they performed unto the Canoas' in pretty good order. In their way down the River, Captain Sharp took a Ship, 
〈◊〉 taken and 〈◊〉.  whose lading consisted of Indigo, Otto, Manteca, or Butter and Pitch; and likewise burned two vessels more, as being of no value. With this he returned on board our ships, being much troubled in his mind, and grieved for the loss of so bold and brave a partner in his Adventures, as Sawkins had constantly showed himself to be. His death was much lamented, and occasioned another party of our men to mutiny, and leave us returning over land, as Captain Coxon and his company had done before.  
Three days after the death of Captain Sawkins, Captain Sharp, 
Sharp chosen.  who was now Commander in chief, gave the ship which he had taken in the River of Puebla Nueba, and which was of the burden of one hundred Tuns, more or less, unto Captain Cook, to Command and Sail in. Ordering withal, that the old vessel which he had, should go with those men that designed to leave us; their Mutiny, and our Distraction being now grown very high. Hereupon Captain Sharp coming on board La Trinidad, the greatest of our ships, asked our men in full Council, who of them were willing to go or stay, and prosecute the design Captain Sawkins had undertaken, which was to remain in the South Sea, and there to make a complete Voyage; after which, he intended to go home round about America, through the straits of Magallanes. He added withal, that he did not as yet fear, or doubt in the least, but to make each man who should stay with him, worth one thousand pound, by the fruits he hoped to reap of that Voyage. All those who had remained after the departure of Captain Coxon, for love of Captain Sawkins, and only to be in his company, and under his Conduct, thinking thereby to make their fortunes, would stay no longer, but pressed to departed. Among this number I acknowledge myself to have been one, 
Many leave them.  as being totally desirous in my mind, to quit those hazardous adventures, and return homewards in company of those who were now going to leave us. Yet being much afraid and averse to trust myself among wild Indians any farther, I chose rather to stay, though unwilling, and venture on that long and dangerous Voyage. Besides which danger of the Indians, I considered that the Rains were now already up, and it would be hard passing so many Gullies, which of necessity would then be full of water, and consequently create more than one single peril unto the undertakers of that Journey. Yet notwithstanding, sixty three men of our company were resolved to encounter all these hardships, and to departed from us. Hereunto they took their leave of us, and returned homewards, taking with them the Indian Kings Son, and the rest of the Indians for their guide's over-land. They had, as was said above, the ship wherein Captain Cook sailed to carry them: and out of our Provision as much as would serve for triple their number.  
Thus on the last day of May they departed, 
A small account of the Isle of Cayboa.  leaving us employed about taking in water, and cutting down wood, at the Island of Cayboa aforementioned, where this mutiny happened. Here we caught very good Tortoise, and Red Deer. We killed also Alligators of a very large size, some of them being above twenty foot in length. But we could not find but that they were very fearful of a Man, and would fly from us very hastily when we hunted them. This Island lieth S. S. E. from the mouth of the River abovementioned. On the Southeast side of the Island is a shoal, or spit of sand, which stretcheth itself the space of a quarter of a League into the Sea. Here therefore, just within this shoal, we anchored in the depth of fourteen fathom water. The Island on this side thereof maketh two great Bays, in the first of which we watered, at a certain pond not distant above the cast of a stone up from the Bay. In this pond, as I was washing myself, and standing under a Manzanilla-tree, a small shower of rain happened to fall on the tree, and from thence dropped on my skin. These drops caused me to break out all over my body into red spots, of which I was not well for the space of a week after. Here I eat very large Oysters, 
 the biggest that ever ●eat in my life; insomuch, that I was forced to cut them into four pieces; each quarter of them being a good mouthful.  
Three days after the departure of the Mutineers, Captain Sharp ordered us to burn the ship that hitherto had sailed in, only out of design to make use of the Ironwork belonging to said Vessel. Withal, we put all the Flour that was her lading into the last Prize, taken in the River of Puebla Nova; 
〈…〉 against Captain Cook.  and Captain Cook, as was said before, was ordered to command her. But the men belonging to his company would not sail any longer under his command. Hereupon, he quitted his vessel and came on board our Admiral, the great Ship abovementioned, called La Trinidad, determining to rule over such unruly company no longer. In his place was put one, 
 whose name was John Cox, an Inhabitant of New-England, who forced Kindred, as was thought, upon Captain Sharp, out of old acquaintance, in this conjuncture of time, only to advance himself. Thus he was made, as it were, Vice-Admiral unto Captain Sharp. The next day three of our Prisoners, viz. an Indian, who was Captain of a ship, and two Mulatos, ran away from us, and made their escape.  
After this it was thought convenient to send Captain Peralta prisoner in the Admiral, 
Captain Peralta removed.  on board the Ship of Mr. Cox. This was done, to the intent he might not hinder the endeavours of Captain Juan, who was Commander of the Money-ship we took, as was mentioned at the Island of Tavoga. For this man had now promised to do great things for us, by Piloting and conducting us unto several places of great Riches. But more especially to Guayaquil, where he said we might lay down our Silver, and lad our vessels with Gold. This design was undertaken by Captain Sawkins, and had not the headstrongness of his men brought him to the Island of Cayboa, where he lost his life, he had certainly effected it before now. That night we had such thunder and lightning, 
Great thunder.  as I never had heard before in all my life. Our Prisoners told us, that in these parts it very often causeth great damages both by Sea and Land. And my opinion gave me to believe, that our Mainmast received some damage in this occasion. The rainy season being now entered, the wind for the most part was at N. W. though not without some calms.   

CHAP. X. They depart from the Island of Cayboa unto the Isle of Gorgona, where they Careen their Vessels. Description of this Isle. They resolve to go and plunder Arica, leaving their design of Guayaquil.  
HAving got in all things necessary for Navigation, 
They set sail from Cayboa.  we were now in a readiness to departed, on Sunday June the 6th 1680. That day we had some rain fell, which now was very frequent in all places. About five of the clock in the evening we set sail from the Island of Cayboa, with a small breeze, the wind being at S. S. W. Our course was E. S. by E and S. E. having all night a very small, or little wind. The same calmness of weather continued all the next day; insomuch, that we lay and drove only as the current horsed us to N. W.  
Little better than a calm we had also the third day of our Navigation. Mean while a current drove us to the Westward. About Sunrising we descried Quicara, which at that time bore N.W. by W. from us; at the distance of five Leagues▪ more or less. With the rising of the Sun an easy gale of wind sprung up, so that at noon we had altered our bearing, which was then N. by E. being six Leagues distant, and appearing thus, as is underneath demonstrated.  
QVICARA Lat. 7 Deg. 40. N.  
These are two several Islands, whereof the least is to the Southward of the other. 
Quicara 〈◊〉.  The Land is a low table Land: these Islands being more than three Leagues in length. About six of the clock that evening, we were nigh ten Leagues distant W.S.W. from them. Much like unto the former weather we had the fourth day of our Sailing, with little wind in the forenoon, and rather less than more in the afternoon. I judged about the middle of the day, we were at the distance of twenty Leagues S. S. W. from the said Islands.  
Thursday June the Tenth, we had very small and variable winds. This day I reckoned that we had made hitherto a S. by E. way, and a S. by W. from our departure; being driven by a current, according to the observation I made, into the Latitude of six degrees and thirty minutes.  
This day we saw much Tortoise floating upon the Sea. 
Much Tortoise and other fish.  Hereupon, we hoist out our Boat, and came to one of them, who offered not to stir until she was struck; and even then not to sink to the bottom, but rather to swim away. The sea hereabouts is very full of several sorts of Fish, as Dolphins, Bonitoes, Albicores, Mullets, and Old Wives, etc. which came swimming about our ship in whole shoals. The next day, which was Friday, we had likewise very little wind; which was no more than we had all Thursday night, with some showers of rain. That day we had an observation, which was six deg. N. latitude. In the evening a fresh wind came up at S. W. our course being S. S. E. On Saturday we had in like manner, about seven in the morning, a fresh breeze at South. So we stood W. S. W. with cloudy weather, and several showers of rain. This day our Spanish prisoners informed us, we must not expect any settled wind, 
Inconstancy of win●●.  until we came within the Latitude of three degrees. For all along the Western shore of these seas, there is little wind; which is the cause that those ships that go from Acapulco unto the Islands called de las Philippinas, do coast along the shore of California, 
How the Spaniards go to Philippinas▪  until they get into the height of forty five degrees; yea sometimes of fifty degrees latitude. As the wind varied, so we tacked several times, thereby to make the best of our way that was possible to the Southward.  
As our Prisoners had informed us, 
Great calm.  so we found it by experience. For on the next day, which was Sunday June the 13th, we had very little wind, and most commonly none, for the space of twenty four hours. 〈…〉 we tried the current of the sea, and found it very strong to the Eastward. The same day we had much rain, and in the afternoon a small breeze at West, and West South West, but mostly at West. Yet notwithstanding all this calmness of weather, the next day in the morning very early, by a sudden gale of wind which arose, we made shift to split our main topsail. We had all the night before, and that day, continual and incessant showers of rain, and made a S. W. and by south way; seeing all along as we went a multitude of Dolphins, Bonitoes, and several other sorts of fish floating upon those Seas, whereof in the afternoon we caught many, the weather being now changed from stormy to calm again; 
 insomuch that we could fish as we sailed along, or rather as we lay tumbling in the calm.  

 Tuesday June the 15th, the morning continued calm, as the day ●efore; and this day also we saw multitudes of fish of several sorts, whereof we caught some for our Table as we were wont to do. By an observation which was made this day, we found ourselves to be now in the latitude of four degrees and twenty one minutes. At this time the course of our Navigation, 
 and our whole design was to go and careen our Vessels at the Islands commonly called by the Spaniards, de los Galapagos, that is to say, of the Tortoises, being so denominated from the infinite number of those Animals swarming and breeding thereabouts. These Islands are situated under the Aequinoctial Line, at the distance of a hundred Leagues more or less from the main Continent of America, in the South Sea. In the afternoon of this day we had a small breeze to push us forwards.  
June the 16th being Wednesday, we made our way this day, 
Great reins all 〈…〉.  and for the four and twenty hours last passed, E.S. E. with much rain, which ceased not to fall, as in all this Voyage, since our departure from Cayboa. This day likewise we caught several Dolphins, and other sorts of fish. But in the evening we had again a fresh breeze at S. by W. our course being, as was just now said, E. S. E.  

 The next day, which was June the 17th, about five in the morning we descried Land, which appeared all along to be very low, and likewise full of Creeks and Bays. We instantly asked our Pilot what Land that was before us? But he replied, he knew it not. Hereupon, being doubtful of our condition, we called Mr. Cox on board us, who brought Captain Peralta with him. This Gentleman being asked, presently told us, the Land we saw was the Land of Barbacoa, being almost a wild Country all over. Withal, he informed us, that to Leeward of us, at the distance of ten Leagues, or thereabouts, did lie an Island called by the name of Gorgona; the which Island, he said, 
The Island of Gorgona, and i●s qualities.  the Spaniards did shun, and very seldom come nigh unto, by reason of the incessant and continual rains there falling; scarce one day in the year being dry at that place. Captain Sharp having heard this information of Captain Peralta, judged the said Island might be the fittest place for our company to careen at; considering, that if the Spaniards did not frequent it, 
They resolve to careen there.  we might in all probability lie there undiscryed, and our Enemies the Spaniards, in the mean time might think, that we were gone out of those Seas. At this time it was, that I seriously repent my staying in the South Seas, and that I did not return homewards in company of them that went before us. For I knew, and could easily perceive, that by these delays the Spaniards would gain time, and be able to send advice of our coming to every Port all along the Coast, so that we should be prevented in all, or most of our attempts and designs wheresoever we came. But those of our company, who had got money by the former Prizes of this Voyage, overswayed the others who had lost all their booty at gaming. Thus we bore away for the Island aforesaid of Gorgona, and at the distance of six Leagues and an half, at S.W. I observed it to make the appearance following.  
GORGONA. Lat. 1.00. N.  
On the main Land over against this Island of Gorgona, we were told by our prisoners, 
A pla●e where Gol● is gathered.  that up a great Laguna, or Lake, is seated an Indian Town, where they have great quantity of sand grains of Gold. Moreover, that five days journey up a River, belonging to the said Laguna, do dwell four Spanish Superintendents, who have each of them the charge of overseeing fifty or sixty Indians, who are employed in gathering that Gold which slippeth from the chief Collectors, or finders thereof These are at least threescore and ten, or fourscore Spaniards, with a great number of slaves belonging unto them, who dwell higher up then these four Superintendents, at the distance of twenty five or thirty days Journey on the said River. That once every year, at a certain season, there cometh a vessel from Lima, the Capital City of Peru, to fetch the Gold that here is gathered; and withal, to bring unto these people such Necessaries as they want. By Land it is nothing less than six week's travel from thence to Lima.  
The main Land to windward of this Island is very low, and full of Rivers. All along the Coast it raineth most desperately. The Island is distant from the Continent ●●ly the space of four Leagues. Mean while we lay at it, I took the whole circumference thereof, which is according to what is here underneath described.  
Isla. de la Gorgôna or Capt: Sharpes Isle  
Captain Sharp gave unto this Island the name of Sharps Isle, by reason we careened at this place. We anchored on the South side of the Island, at the mouth of a very ●ine River, which there disgorgeth itself into the Sea. There belong unto this Island about thirty Rivers and Rivulets, all which fall from the Rocks on the several sides of the Island. The whole circumference thereof is about three L●agues and an half round, being all high and mountainous land, excepting only on that side where we cast Anchor. Here therefore we moored our ship in the depth of eighteen or twenty fathom water, and began to unrig the vessel. But we were four or five days space before we could get our Sails dry, 
 so as to be able to take them from the yards, there falling a shower of rain almost every hour of the day and night. The main Land to the East of the Island, and so stretching Northward, is extreme high and towering, and withal perpetually clouded, excepting only at the rising of the Sun, at which time the tops of those hills are clear. From the South side of this Island where we Ankored, as was said above, we could see the low-land of the main; at least a point thereof which lieth nearest unto the Island. The appearance it maketh, is as it were of Trees growing out of the water.  
Friday July the second, as we were heaving down our ship, our Mainmast happened to crack. Hereupon our Carpenters were constrained to cut out large fishes, and fish it, as the usual terms of that art do name the thing.  
On the next day after the mischance of our Mainmast, we killed a Snake which had fourteen inches in circumference, 
A 〈◊〉 Snake.  and was eleven foot in length. About the distance of a League from this Island, runneth a ledge of Rocks, over which the water continually breaketh; the ledge being about two miles, more or less, in length. Had we anchored but half a mile more Northerly, we had rid in much smother water; for here where we were, the wind came ●n upon us in violent gusts. Mean while we were there, from June the thirtie●h, to July the third, we had dry weather, which was esteemed as a rarity by the Spaniards our prisoners. And every day we saw Whales and Grampusses, 
Whales and Grampuss●● at Gorgona.  who would often come and drive under our ship. We fired at them several times, but our Bullets rebounded from their bodies. Our choice and best provisions here, were Indian Coneys, Monkeys, Snakes, Oysters, Cunks, Periwinkles, and a few small Turtle, with some other sorts of good fish. Here in like manner we caught a Sloth, 
A Sloth taken.  a beast well deserving that name, given it by the Spaniards, by whom it is called Pereza, from the Latin word Pigritia.  
At this Island died Josephe Gabriel, a Spaniard, 
Deat● of a Spanish prisoner.  born in Chile, who was to have been our Pilot unto Panama. He was the same man who had stolen and married the Indian Kings Daughter, as was mentioned above. He had all along been very true and faithful unto us, in discovering several Plots and Conspiracies of our prisoners, either to get away or destroy us. His death was occasioned by a Calenture, or Malignant Fever, which killed him after three days sickness, having lain two days senseless. During the time of our stay at this Island, we lengthened our top-sail-yards, and got up top gallant masts; we made two stay-sails, and refitted our ship very well. But we wanted Provisions extremely, as having nothing considerable of any sort, but flower and water. Being almost ready to departed, Captain Sharp our Commander, gave us to understand, 
They change resolution.  he had changed his resolution concerning the design of going to Guayaquil, for he thought it would be in vain to go thither, considering, that in all this time we must of necessity be descried before now. Yet notwithstanding he himself before had persuaded us to stay. Being very doubtful among ourselves what course we should take, a certain old man, who had long time sailed among the Spaniards, told us, he could carry us to a place called Arica. Unto which Town, he said, all the Plate was brought down from Potosi, Chuquisaca, and several other places within the Land, 
They design for Arica.  where it was d●gged out of the Mountains and Mines. And that he doubted not, but that we might get there of purchase at least two thousand pound every man. For all the Plate of the South Sea lay there as it were in store; being deposited at the said place, until such time as the ships did fetch it away. Being moved with these reasons, and having deliberated thereupon, we resolved in the end to go unto the said place. At this Island of Gorgona aforementioned, we likewise took down our Round-house coach, and all the high carved work belonging to the stern of the ship. For when we took her from the Spaniards before Panama, she was high as any Third-Rate ship in England.   

CHAP. XI. The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Gorgona, with design to plunder Arica. They lose one another by the way. They touch at the Isle of Plate, or Drakes Isle, where they meet again. Description of this Isle. Some Memoirs of Sir Francis Drake. An account of this Voyage, and the Coasts all along. They sail as far in a fortnight, as the Spaniards usually do in three months.  

〈…〉 Gorgona.  ON Sunday July the 25th, in the afternoon, all things being now in a readiness for our departure, we set sail, and stood away from the Island of Gorgona, or Sharps I●●e, with a small breeze which served us at N. W. But as the S●n went down that day, so our breeze died away by degrees. Yet already we could begin to experiment, that our ship sailed much better, since the taking down her round house, and the other alterations which we made in 〈◊〉.  
The next day about two of the clock in the morning, we had a land breeze to help us, which lasted for the space of six hours, more or less. So that at noon we found ourselves to be five Leagues and a half distant to the South West from Gorgona. This day the Spaniards our prisoners, told us, in common discourse, 
A deep Coast.  that in most part of this low-land Coast, they find threescore fathom water. In the afternoon we had from land a very strong breeze: mean while we continued making short trips off and in. That night we had much rain for the greatest part of the night, which occasioned the next morning, being the third day of our Navigation, to be very cloudy until ten of the clock. About that hour it cleared up, and then we saw the Island of Gorgona at E. N. E. being distant about twelve Leagues more or less from us. We had the wind all this day at S.W. where it continued, seldom varying above two points of the Compass to the Westwards. Night being come, about ten of the clock, Captain Sharp ordered me to speak unto Captain Cox, and bid him go about and stand off from the shore, for he feared least Cox should come too nigh unto it. But he replied, he knew well, that he might stand in until two of the clock. 
They lose one another.  The next day very early in the morning, we saw him not, the morning being cloudy and stark calm. Yet notwithstanding at eight of the clock it cleared up, and neither then could we see him. From hence we concluded, and so it proved, that we had lost him in the obscurity of the night, through his obstinacy in standing in too long, and not coming about when we spoke unto him. Thus our Admiral's ship was left alone, and we had not the company of Captain Cox any longer in this Voyage, till we arrived at the Isle of Plate, where we had the good fortune to find him again, as shall be mentioned hereafter. The weather being clear this morning, we could see Gorgona, at the distance of at least fifteen or sixteen Leagues to the E. N. E. All this day it continued calm, till about four in the afternoon, at which time we had a W. S. W. wind, which continued to blow all that night.  

〈◊〉 del Gall●.  Thursday July the 29th 1680. This day the wind continued pretty fresh all day long. About four in the afternoon we came within sight of the Island del Gallo, which I guessed to be nigh twenty eight Leagues distant from that of Gorgona, the place of our departure S. W. It is about nine Leagues distant to East from the Main. So that the Island with the Main Land S.W. from it appeareth thus.  
GALLO. Lat. 2.12. N.  
All this day the weather continued clear, and the wind W. S. W.  
The next day being July the 30th, the wind blew very fresh and brisk; insomuch, that we were in some fear for the heads of our low Masts, as being very sensible that they were but weak. About three or four in the afternoon, we saw another Island, six or seven Leagues distant from Gallo, called Gorgonilla. 
 At E. by S. from us it made the appearance which I have here adjoined. All the Main-Land hereabouts lieth very low and flat, and is in very many places overflown and drowned every high-water.  
GORGONILLA.  
On Saturday July the thirty first in the morning, the Island del Gallo, at E.N.E. being distant about eight Leagues, gave us this appearance.  
GALLO, Another Prospect thereof.  
The point of Mangroves is a low and level point, running out S. S. W. This day, and the night before it, we lost by our computation three Leagues of our way. 
They lose wa●▪  Which I believe happened, by reason we stood out too far from the Land, as having stood off all night long.  
August the first, which was Sunday, we had a very fresh wind at W. S. W. This was joined also with several small showers of rain which fell that day. In the mean while we got pretty well to windward with it, by making small trips to and fro; which we performed most commonly, by standing in three glasses, and as many out.  
The next day, August the second in the morning, 
Land of San Tiago.  we came up unto the high-land of San Tiago, where beginneth the high-land of this Coast. We kept at the distance of ten Leagues from it, and making continual short trips, as was mentioned before. The next day likewise we continued to do the same. But the weather was cloudy, and for the most part full of rain.  
Wednesday August the fourth, 
Land of San Matteo.  we continued still turning in the winds eye, as we had done for two days before. This day in the afternoon we discovered three Hills at E. N. E. of our ship. These Hills make the Land of San Matteo, which giveth this following appearance.  
San MATTEO.  

Cape St. Francis.  All the Coast along hereabouts is high land. That evening also we saw the Cape of San Francisco. At first this Cape appeared like unto two several Islands. But two hours after, at the distance of twelve Leagues, at S. by W. it looked thus.  
Cape of San FRANCISCO.  
Thursday August the fifth, we being then about the Cape, it looked very like unto Beachyhead in England. It is full of white Cliffs on all sides. The land turneth off here to the Eastward of the South, and maketh a large and deep Bay, the circumference whereof is full of pleasant Hills. In the bite of the Bay are two high and rocky Islands, the which represent exactly two ships with their Sails full. We were now come out of the rainy Countries, into a pleasant and fair Region, where we had for the most part a clear sky, and dry weather. Only now and then we could here find a small mist, which soon would vanish away. In the mean while, every night a great dew used to fall, which supplied the defect of rain.  
The two next days following, we continued plying to windward with fair weather, nothing else remarkable happening in them which might deserve any notice to be taken thereof.  
On Sunday August the eighth, we came close under a wild and mountainous Country. This day likewise we saw Cape Passao, 
Cabo Passao.  at the distance of ten Leagues more or less to windward of us. Ever since we came on this side Mangrove point, we observed a windward Current did run all along as we sailed. Under shore the Land is full of white Cliffs and Groves; lower towards the pitch of the Cape.  
The next day we had both a fair day, and a fresh wind to help us on our Voyage. We observed that Cape Passao maketh three points, between which are two Bays. The Leeward-most of the two, is of the length of three Leagues, and the other of four. Adjoining to the Bays is seen a pleasant valley. Our prisoners informed us, that Northward of these Capes live certain Indians, who sell Maiz, and other Provisions to any ships that happen to come in there. The Cape itself is a continued Cliff, covered with several sorts of shrubs and low bushes. Under these Cliffs lieth a sandy Bay of the depth of forty feet. The Spaniards say, that the wind is always here between the S.S.W. and W.S.W. The Cape representeth with much likelyness the brow of an Alligator or Cayman. At South Cape Passao appeareth thus.  
Cape PASSAO. Lat. 1.30. S.  
Tuesday August the Tenth. This morning the sky was so thick and hasey, that we could not see the high-land; though it were just before us, and not altogether two Leagues distant from us. But as soon as it cleared up, we stood in towards the Land, until we came within a mile of the shore. Here having sounded, we found seven fathom and a half water, under which was a light and clayey ground. The Coast all along is very mountainous, and likewise full of high and towering Cliffs. When we sounded, the Tide was almost at low-water. Here it ebbeth and floweth nigh four fathom perpendicular. From this Cape the land runneth along S. E. for the space of three or four Leagues, with huge high-land Cliffs, like unto those of Calais over against England. Being past this Cape, high-land South from us, is Cape St. Laurence.  
August the 11th, we found ourselves N. N. W. from Monte de Christo, 
Monte de Christo.  being a very high and round hill. From thence to windward is seen a very pleasant Country, with spots here and there of woody land; which causeth the Country all over to look like so many enclosures of ripe Corn fields. To Leeward of the said Hill, the Land is all high and hilly, with white Cliffs at the seaside. The Coast runneth S. W. till it reacheth unto a point of Land, within which is the Port of Manta, as it is called. This Port of Manta, 
Port of Manta  is nothing else than a settlement of Spaniards and Indians together, where ships that want Provisions do call in, and are furnished with several necessaries. About six or seven Leagues to windward of this Port is Cape St. Laurence, butting out into the Sea, being in form like unto the top of a Church. Monte de Christo giveth this appearance at Sea.  
Monte de CHRISTO. Lat. 50. S.  
The Cape riseth higher and higher from the Port of Manta. 
Water-Snakes and 〈…〉  As we sailed along we saw multitudes of Grampusses every day; as also Water-Snakes of divers colours. Both the Spaniards, and Indians too are very fearful of these Snakes, as believing there is no cure for their bitings. At the distance of eight Leagues, or thereabouts, to Leeward of Cape St. Laurence, it appeareth thus.  
Cape St. LAURENCE. Lat. 55. S.  
This day before night we came within sight of Manta. Here we saw the Houses of the Town belonging to the Port, which were not above twenty or thirty Indian houses, lying under the windward and the Mount. We were not willing to be descried by the Inhabitants of the said place, and hereupon we stood off to sea again.  
On Thursday August the 12th, in the morning, we saw the Island of Plate at S. W. at the distance of five Leagues more or less. It appeared unto us to be an even land. 
Isle of Palte.  Having made this Island, we resolved to go thither and resit our rigging, and get some Goats which there run wild up and down the Country. For as was said before, at this time we had no other provision than flour and water. The Island itself is indifferent high land, and off at sea, looketh thus, as is here described.  
Isle of PLATE. Lat. 2.42. S.  
But the high-land of Cape Passao, of which we have spoken before, 
Cape Passao.  at the distance of fifteen Leagues to North, giveth in several hammocks this appearance.  
High-land of Cape PASSAO.  

C. St. Laurence.  The Land of Cape Lorenzo is all white Cliffs; the head of the Cape running N. and S. This day several great Whales came up to us, and dived under our ship. One of these Whales followed our ship, from two in the afternoon till dark night.  

〈…〉 Captain Cox, 〈…〉.  The next morning very early, about six of the clock, we came under the aforesaid Isle of Plate, and here unexpectedly, to our great joy, we found at anchor the ship of Captain Cox, with his whole company, whom we had lost at sea for the space of a whole fortnight before. We found they had reached this Island, and had been there at an anchor four days before us, being now just ready to departed from thence. About seven we came to an anchor, and then the other vessel sent us a live Tortoise, and a Goat, to feast upon that day; telling us withal, of great store of Tortoise to be found ashore upon the Bays; and of much fish to be caught hereabouts. 
Description of the Isle of Plate  The Island is very steep on all sides; insomuch, that there is no landing, but only on the N. E. side thereof; where is a Gully, nigh unto which we anchored in twelve fathom water. Here at the distance of a furlong, or little more from the shore, as you go to land, you will see on the left side hill a Cross still standing, being there erected in former times. No Trees are to be found on the whole Island, but only low shrubs, on which the Goats feed; which Cattle is here very numerous. The shore is bold and hard; neither is there any water to be found upon it, excepting only on the S. W. side of the Island, where likewise it cannot be come at, as lying so much enclosed by the Rocks, and too great a Sea hindering the approach unto it in boats.  
This Island received its name from Sir Francis Drake, 
Sir Fr. Drake,  and his famous Actions. For here it is reported by tradition, that he made the dividend, or sharing of that vast quantity of Plate, which he took in the Armada of this Sea, distributing it unto each man of his company by whole bowls full. The Spaniards affirm unto this day, he took at that time twelve score Tuns of Plate, and sixteen Bowls of Coined Money a man; his number being then forty five men in all. Insomuch, that they were forced to heave much of it over board, because his ship could not carry it all. Hence was this Island called by the Spaniards themselves the Isle of Plate, from this great Dividend, and by us Drakes Isle.  
All along as we sailed, 
Spanish Pilots their ignorance.  we found the Spanish Pilots to be very ignorant of the Coasts. But they plead thus much for their ignorance, that the Merchants their employers, either of Mexico, Lima, Panama, or other parts, will not entrust one penny worth of Goods on that man's Vessel that corketh her, for fear lest she should miscarry. Here our Prisoners told us likewise, that in the time of Oliver Cromwell, or the Commonwealth of England, 
A ship with money sent to King Cha●●● the Second▪  a certain ship was fitted out of Lima, with seventy brass Guns, having on board her no less th●n thirty Millions of Dollars, or pieces of Eight. All which vast sum of money was given by the Merchants of Lima, and sent as a Present unto our gracious King or rather his Father) who now reigneth, to supply him in his Exile and distress. But that this great and rich ship was lost by keeping the shore along in the Bay of Manta abovementioned, or thereabouts. What truth there may be in this History, I cannot easily tell. At least, it seemeth to me as scarce deserving any credit.  

 At this Island we took out of Mr. Cox's ship the old Moor, (for of that Nation he was) who pretended he would be our Pilot unto Arica. This was done, lest we should have the misfortune of losing the company of Cox's vessel, as we had done before, our ship being the biggest in burden, and having the greatest number of men. Captain Peralta admired oftentimes that we were gotten so far to windward in so little space of time; whereas they had been, he said, many times three or four months in reaching to this distance from our departure. But their long and tedious Voyages, he added, were occasioned by their keeping at too great a distance from the shore. Moreover, he told us, that had we gone unto the Islands of Galapagos, as we were once determined to do, we had met in that Voyage with many Calms, and such Currents, that many ships have by them been lost, and never heard of to this day. This Island of Plate is about two Leagues in length, and very full of both deep and dangerous Bays, as also such as we call Gully's in these parts. The circumference and description of the said Island is exactly thus.  
S ●. Fran: Drakes Isle or Isla de la Plata  

Great number of Tortoises and Goat's.  We caught at this Island, and salted good number of Goats and Tortoises. One man standing here on a little Bay, in one day turned seventeen Tortoises; besides which number our Mosquito strikers brought us in several more. Captain Sharp our Commander shown himself very ingenious in striking them, he performing it as well as the Tortoise strikers themselves. For these creatures here are so little fearful, that they offer not to sink from the fishermen, but lie still until such time as they are struck. But we experimented that the Tortoises on this side, were not so large nor so sweet unto the taste, as those on the North side of the Island. Of Goats we have taken, killed, and salted above a hundred in a day, and that without any labour. In the mean while we stayed here, we made a square main topsail yard. We cut also six foot of our bolt-sprit, and three foot more of our head. Most of the time that we remained here, we had hasey weather. Only now and then the Sun would happen to break out, and then to shine so hot, that it burned the skin of the necks of several of our men. As for me, my lips were burnt in such manner, that they were not well in a whole week after.   

CHAP. XII. Captain Sharp and his company departed from the Isle of Plate, in prosecution of their Voyage towards Arica. They take two Spanish Vessels by the way, and learn intelligence from the enemy. Eight of their company destroyed at the Isle of Gallo. Tediousness of this Voyage, and great hardship they endured. Description of the Coast all along, and their sailings.  
HAving taken in at the Isle of Plate, 
They depart from the Isle of Plate.  what Provisions and other Necessaries we could get, we set sail from thence on Tuesday the 17th of August, 1680. in prosecution of our Voyage and designs abovementioned, to take and plunder the vastly rich Town of Arica. This day we sailed so well, and the same we did several others afterwards, that we were forced to lie by several times, besides raising our topsails, to keep our other ship company, lest we should lose her again.  
The next morning about break of day, 
They outsail the other Vessel.  we found ourselves to be at the distance of seven or eight Leagues to the Westward of the Island from whence we departed, standing W. by S. with a S. by W. wind. About noon that day we had laid the land. After dinner the wind came at S.S.W. at which time we were forced to stay more than once for the other vessel belonging to our company.  
On the following day we continued in like manner a west course all the day long. Sometimes this day the wind would change, but then in a quarter of an hour it would return to S.S. W. again as before. Hereabouts where we now were, we observed great riplings of the Sea.  
August the twentieth, yesterday in the afternoon about six of the clock, we stood in S. E. But all night and all this day, we had very small winds. We found still that we gained very much of the small ship, which did not a little both perplex and hinder us in our course. 
  
The next day likewise we stood in S. E. by S. though with very little wind, which sometimes varied, as was mentioned above. That day I finished two Quadrants; each of which were two foot and a half radius. 
 Here we had in like manner, as hath been mentioned on other days of our sailings, very many Dolphins, and other sorts of fish swimming about our ship.  
On the morning following we saw again the Island of Plate at NE. of our ship, giving us this appearance at that distance of Prospect.  
Isle of PLATE.  
The same day at the distance of six Leagues more or 〈◊〉 from the said Island, we saw another Island, called 〈◊〉▪ 
 Th●s 〈◊〉 lieth close in by the Main-land. In the 〈◊〉 we observed it to bare E. N. E. from us. Our 〈…〉 by S. and had the wind at sweet. by S. This 〈…〉 we found that our lesser ship was full a great hindrance to our sailing, as being forced to lie by, and stay for her two or three hours every day. We experimented likewise, that the farther from shore we were, the less wind we had all along; and that under the shore we were always sure of a 〈◊〉 gale, though not so favourable unto us as we could wish it to be. Hitherto we had used to stand 〈◊〉 forty Leagues, and yet notwithstanding, in the s●a●e of six days, we had not got above ten Leagues on our voyage, from the place of our departure.  
August the twenty third, this day the wind was S. W. by S. and S. S. W. In the morning we stood off. The Island Solango, at N.E. by N. appeareth thus:  
Isle of SOLANGO.  
At S. by W. and about six League's distance from us, 
Point St. Helen.  we descried a long and even hill. I took it to be an Island, and conjectured it might be at least eight Leagues distant from the Continent. But afterwards we found it was a point of Land joining unto the Main, and is called Point St. Helena, being continued by a piece of Land which lieth low, and in several places is almost drowned from the sight; so that it cannot be seen at two League's distance. In this low-land the Spaniards have convenience for making Pitch, Tar, Salt, and some other things, for which purpose they have several houses here, and a Friar, who serveth them as their Chaplain. From the Island of Solango, unto this place, are reckoned eleven leagues, more or less. The Land is hereabouts indifferent high, and is likewise full of Bays. We had this day very little wind to help us in our Voyage, excepting what blasts came now and then in snatches. These sometimes would prove pretty fair unto us, and allow us for some little while a South course. But our chiefest course was S.E. by S. The point of St. Helen at South half East, and about six League's distance, giveth exactly this appearance as followeth.  
Punta de Santa HELENA.  
Here we found no great current of the Sea to move any way. At the Isle of Plata, afore described, the Sea ebbeth and sloweth nigh thirteen foot perpendicular. About four Leagues to Leeward of this Point is a deep Bay, having a Key at the mouth of it, which taketh up the better part of its wideness. In the deepest part of the Bay on shore, we saw a great smoke, which was at a Village belonging to the Bay; unto which place the people were removed from the Point abovementioned. This afternoon we had a small Westerly wind, our course being S. S. W. Hereabouts it is all along a very bold shore. At three of the clock after noon, we tacked about to clear ourselves of the Point. 
●ark ●●gs.  Being now a little way without the Point, we espied a sail, which we conceived to be a Bark. Hereupon, we hoist out our Canoa, and sent in pursuit of her, which made directly for the shore. But the sail proved to be nothing else, than a pair of Barklogs, which arriving on shore, the men spread their sail on the sand of the Bay to dry. At the same time there came down upon the shore an Indian on horseback, who hallowed unto our Canoa, which had followed the Logs. But our men fearing to discover who we were, in case they went too near the shore, l●●t the design and returned back unto us. In these parts the Indians have no Canoas', 
 nor any wood indeed that may be thought fit to make them of. Had we been descried by these poor people, they would in all probability have been very fearful of us. But they offered not to stir, which gave us to understand, they knew us not. We could perceive from the ship a great path leading unto the Hills. So that we believed this place to be a look-out, or watch-place, for the security of Guayaquil. Between four and five we doubled the point, and then we descried the Point Chandy, at the distance of six Leagues S. S. E. from this point. At first sight it seemed like unto a long Island, but withal, lower than that of St. Helena.  
Tuesday August the 24th, 
Cox's vessel taken in a Tow.  this day at noon we took the other ship wherein Captain Cox sailed into a Tow, she being every day a greater hindrance than before unto our Voyage. Thus about three in the afternoon we lost sight of land, in standing over for Cape Blanco. Here we found a strong current to move unto the S. W. The wind was at S.W. by S. our course being S. by E. At the upper end of this Gulf, which is framed by the two Capes aforementioned, standeth the City of Guayaquil, 
Guayaquil.  being a very rich place, and the Embarcadero, or Seaport unto the great City of Quito. Unto this place likewise, many of the Merchants of Lima do usually send the Money they design for Old Spain in Barks, and by that means save the Custom that otherwise they should pay unto the King by carrying it on board of the Fleet. Hither cometh much Gold from Quito, and very good and strong broad-cloath, together with Images for the use of the Churches, and several other things of considerable value. But more especially Cacao-nut, whereof Chocolate is made, 
Cacao-nut ●he best sort.  which is supposed here to be the best in the whole Universe. The Town of Guayaquil consisteth of about one hundred and fifty great houses, and twice as many little ones. This was the Town unto which Captain Sawkins intended to make his Voyage, as was mentioned above. When ships of greater burden come into this Gulf, they anchor without Lapina, and then put their lading into lesser Vessels to carry it unto the Town. Towards the evening of this day, a small breeze sprung up, varying from point to point. After which, about nine of the clock at night we tacked about, and stood off to Sea, W. by N.  

A 〈◊〉 taken.  As soon as we had tacked, we happened to espy a Sail N.N.E. from us. Hereupon, we instantly cast off our other Vessel, which we had in a Tow, and stood round about after them. We came very near unto the vessel before they saw us, by reason of the darkness of the night. As soon as they espied us, they immediately clapped on a wind, and sailed very well before us; insomuch, that it was a pretty while before we could come up with them, and within call. We halled them in Spanish, by means of an Indian prisoner, and commanded them to lower their topsails. They answered, they would soon make us to lower our own. Hereupon, we fired several Guns at them, and they as thick at us again with their Harquibusses. Thus they fought us for the space of half an hour, or more, and would have done it longer, had we not killed the man at the Helm; after whom, none of the rest dared to be so hardy as to take his place. With another of our shot we cut in pieces and disabled their maintop halliards. Hereupon, they cried out for Quarter, which we gave them, and entered their ship. Being possessed of the Vessel, we found in her five and thirty men: of which number twenty four were Natives of Old Spain. They had one and thirty fire arms on board the ship for their defence. They had not fought us, as they declared afterwards, but only out of a bravado, having promised on shore so to do, in case they met us at Sea. The Captain of this Vessel was a person of Quality, and his Brother, since the death of Don Jacinto de Barahona, killed by us in the Engagement before Panama, was now made Admiral of the Sea Armada. With him we took also in this Bark, five or six other persons of Quality. They did us in this fight, though short, very great damage in our Rigging, by cutting it in pieces. Besides which, they wounded two of our men. And a third man was wounded by the negligence of one of our own men, occasioned by a Pistol which went off unadvisedly. About eleven of the clock this night we stood off to the West.  
The next morning about break of day, 
What information they had from the Prize.  we hoist out our Canoa, and went aboard the Bark which we had taken the night before. We transported on board our own ship more of the Prisoners taken in the said vessel, and began to examine them, to learn what intelligence we could from them. The Captain of the vessel, who was a very civil and meek Gentleman, satisfied our desires in this point very exactly, saying unto us: Gentlemen, I am now your prisoner at War by the overruling providence of fortune; and moreover, am very well satisfied that no money whatsoever can procure my ransom, at least for the present at your hands. Hence I am persuaded, it is not my interest to tell you a Lie; which if I do, I desire you to punish me as severely as you shall think fit. We heard of your taking and destroying our Armadilla, and other ships at Panama, about six weeks after that Engagement, by two several Barks which arrived here from thence. But they could not inform us whether you designed to come any farther to the Southward; but rather, desired we would send them speedily all the help by Sea that we could. Hereupon, we sent the noise and rumour of your being in these Seas, by land unto Lima, desiring they would expedite what succours they could send to join with ours. We had at that time in our Harbour two or three great ships, but all of them very unfit to sail. For this reason, at Lima, the Viceroy of Peru pressed three great Merchant ships, into the biggest of which he put Fourteen brass guns; into the second, Ten; and in the other Six. Unto these he added two Barks, and put seven hundred and fifty Soldiers on board them all. Of this number of men they landed eightscore at Point St. Helena; all the rest being carried down to Panama, with design to fight you there. Besides these Forces, two other men of War, bigger than the aforementioned, are still lying at Lima, and fitting out there in all speed to follow and pursue you. One of these men of war is equipped with thirty six brass guns, and the other with thirty. These ships, beside their compliment of seamen, have four hundred Soldiers added unto them by the Viceroy. Another man of war belonging to this number, and lesser than the aforementioned, is called the Patache. This ship consisteth of twenty four guns, and was sent to Arica to fetch the King's Plate from thence. But the Viceroy having received intelligence of your exploits at Panama, sent for this ship back from thence with such haste, that they came away and left the Money behind them. Hence the Patache now lieth at the Port of Callao, ready to sail on the first occasion, or news of your arrival thereabouts: they having for this purpose sent unto all parts very strict orders to keep a good look-out on all sides, and all places along the Coasts. Since this, from Manta they sent us word, that they had seen two Ships at sea pass by that place. And from the Goat Key also we heard, that the Indians had seen you, and that they were assured, one of your vessels was the ship called lafoy Trinidad, which you had taken before Panama, as being a ship very well known in these Seas. From hence we concluded that your design was to ply, and make your Voyage thereabouts. Now this Bark wherein you took us prisoners being bound for Panama, the Governor of Guayaquil sent us out before her departure, if possible to discover you. Which if we did, we were to run the Bark on shore and get away, or else to fight you with these Soldiers and fire arms that you see. As soon as we heard of your being in these Seas, we built two Forts, the one of six Guns, and the other of four, for the defence of the Town. At the last Muster taken in the Town of Guayaquil, we had there eight hundred and fifty men, of all colours; but when we came out, we left only two hundred men that were actually under Arms. Thus ended the Relation of that worthy Gentleman. About noon that day we unrigged the Bark which we had taken, and after so doing sunk her. Then we stood S.S.E. and afterwards S. by W. and S.S.W. That evening we saw Point St. Helena at North half East, at the distance of nine Leagues more or less.  
The next day, being August the 26th, in the morning we stood S. 
 That day we cried out all our pillage, and found that it amounted unto 3276 Pieces of Eight, which was accordingly divided by shares amongst us. We also punished a Friar, 
Their cruelty towards a Friar.  who was Chaplain to the Bark aforementioned, and shot him upon the deck, casting him overboard before he was dead. Such cruelties though I abhorred very much in my heart, yet here was I forced to hold my tongue and contradict them not, as having not authority to oversway them. About ten of the clock this morning we saw Land again, and the Pilot said we were sixteen Leagues to leeward of Cabo Blanco. Hereupon we stood off and in, close under the shore; the which all appeared to be barren land.  
The morning following we had very little wind; 
Eight of their men destroyed at Gallo.  so that we advanced but slowly all that day. To windward of us we could perceive the Continent to be all high land, being whitish clay, full of white Cliffts. This morning in common discourse, our Prisoners confessed unto us, and acknowledged the destruction of one of our little Barks, which we lost in our way to the Island of Cayboa. They stood away, as it appeared by their information, for the Goat-key, thinking to find us there, as having heard Captain Sawkins say, that he would go thither. On their way they happened to fall in with the Island of Gallo, and understanding its weakness by their Indian Pilot, they ventured on shore, and took the place, carrying away three white women in their company. But after a small time of Cruising, they returned again to the aforesaid Island, where they stayed the space of two or three days: after which time they went out to sea again. Within three or four days they came to a little Key four Leagues distant from this Isle. But mean while they had been out and in thus several times, one of their prisoners made his escape unto the Main, and brought off from thence fifty men with fire-arms. These placing themselves in Ambuscade, at the first volley of their shot, they killed six of the seven men that belonged unto the Bark. The other man that was left took quarter of the enemy; and he it was that discovered unto them our design upon the Town of Guayaquil. By an observation which we made this day, we found ourselves to be in the latitude of 3 d. 50. S. 
An Embargo laid.  At this time our prisoners told us, there was an Embargo laid on all the Spanish ships, commanding them not to stir out of the Ports, for fear of their falling into our hands at Sea.  
Saturday August the 28th, this morning we took out all the water, 
They 〈◊〉 Captain Cox's 〈◊〉.  and most part of the flower that was in Captain Cox's vessel. The people in like manner came on board our ship. Having done this, we made a hole in the vessel, and left her to sink, with a small old Canoa at her stern. To Leeward of Manta, a League from shore, in eighteen fathom water, there runneth a great current outwards. About eleven in the forenoon we weighed Anchor, with a wind at W.N. W. turning it out. Our number now in all being reckoned, we found ourselves to be one hundred and forty men, two boys, and fifty five prisoners, being all now in one and the same bottom. 
Their whole number.  This day we got six or seven Leagues in the winds eye.  
All the day following we had a very strong S. S. W. wind; 
The first place settled in these Seas.  insomuch, that we were forced to sail with two riffs in our maintop sail, and one also in our foretop sail. Here Captain Peralta told us, that the first place which the Spaniards settled in these parts, after Panama, was Tumbes, a place that now was to Leeward of us, in this Gulf where we now were. 
A strange story  That there a Priest went ashore with a Cross in his hand, while ten thousand Indians stood gazing at him. Being landed on the strand, there came out of the woods two Lions; that he laid the Cross gently on their backs, and they instantly fell down and worshipped it: and moreover, that two Tigers following them, did the same; whereby these Animals gave unto the Indians to understand the excellency of the Christian Religion, which they soon after embraced. About four in the evening we came abreast the Cape, which is the highest part of all. The Land hereabouts appeareth to be barren and rockey. 
●aho Blanco.  At three League's distance East from us, the Cape shown thus:  
Cape BLANCO.  
Were it not for a windward Current which runneth under the shore hereabouts, it were totally impossible for any ships to get about this Cape; there being such a great current to Leeward in the offing. In the last Bark which we took, of which we spoke in this Chapter, we made Prisoner one Nicolas Moreno, a Spaniard by Nation, and who was esteemed to be a very good Pilot of the South Sea. This man did not cease continually to praise our ship for her sailing, and especially for the alterations we had made in her. As we went along, we observed many Bays to lie between this Cape and Point Parina, of which we shall soon make mention hereafter.  
In the night the wind came about to S. S.E. and we had a very stiff gale of it. 
Point Parina.  So that by break of day the next morning, we found ourselves to be about five League's distance to windward of the Cape afore mentioned. The Land hereabouts maketh three or four several Bays, and groweth lower and lower, by how much the nigher we come unto Punta Parina. This Point showeth itself at first sight thereof like unto two Islands. Between four and five of the clock that evening, we were West from the said Point.  
The next day likewise, being the last day of August, the wind still continued S. S. E. as it had done the whole day before. This day we thought it convenient to stand farther out to sea, for fear of being descried at Paita, 
Paita.  which now was not very far distant fromus. The morning proved to be hasey. But about eleven we espied a Sail, which stood then just as we did, E. by S. Coming nearer unto it, by degrees we found her to be nothing else than a pair of Barklogs under a sail, which were going that way. Our Pilot advised us not to meddle with those Logs, nor mind them in the least, 
 for it was very doubtful whether we should be able to come up with them or not; and then by giving chase unto them, we should easily be descried and known to be the English Pirates, as they called us. These Barklogs sail excellently well for the most part, and some of them are of such a bigness, that they will carry two hundred and fifty packs of Meal from the Valleys unto Panama, without wetting any of it. This day by an observation made, we found ourselves to be in four degrees fifty five Latitude South. Point Parina at N.E. by E. and at the distance of six Leagues more or less, giveth this following appearance.  
Punta PARINA.  
At the same time la Silla de Paita bore from us S.E. by E. being distant only seven or eight Leagues. It had the form of a high Mountain, and appeared thus unto us.  
La Silla de PAITA.  
The Town of Paita itself is situated in a deep Bay, about two Leagues to Leeward of this Hill. It serveth for an Embarcadero, or Port Town, unto another great place which is distant from thence about thirteen Leagues higher in the Country, and is called Piura, being seated in a very barren Country. 
Piura.   
On Wednesday the first of September, our course was S. by W. The midnight before this day we had a land-wind that sprung up. In the afternoon La Silla de Paita, at the distance of seven Leagues, at E. by N. appeareth thus.  
La Silla de PAITA.  
All along hereabouts is nothing but barren land, as was said before. Hereabouts likewise for three or four days last passed, we observed along the Coasts many Seals.  
That night as we sailed, we saw something that appeared unto us to be as it were a light. And the next morning we espied a sail, 
A Pri●e 〈◊〉.  from whence we judged the light had come. The vessel was at the distance of six Leagues from us, in the winds eye, and thereupon we gave her chase. She stood to windward as we did. This day we had an observation, which gave us the Lat. 5 d. 30 S. At night we were about four Leagues to Leeward of her; but so great a Mist fell, that we suddenly lost sight of her. At this time the weather was as cold with us as in England in November. Every time we went about with our ship, the other did the like. 
 Our Pilot told us, that this ship set forth from Guayaquil eleven days before they were taken. And that she was laden with Rigging, Woollen, and Cotton Cloth, and other Manufactures made at Quito. Moreover, that he had heard that they had spent a Mast, and had put into Paita to resit it.  
The night following; they shown us several lights through their negligence, which they ought not to have done, for by that means we steered directly after them. The next morning she was more than three Leagues in the winds eye distant from us. Had they suspected us, it could not be doubted, but they would have made away towards the Land; but they seemed not to fly nor stir for our chase. The Land here all along is level, and not very high. The weather was hasey, so that about eleven of the clock that morning we lost sight of her. At this time we had been for the space of a whole week, 
 at an allowance of only two draughts of water each day, so scarce were Provisions with us. That afternoon we saw the vessel again, and at night we were not full two Leagues distant from her, and not more than half a League to Leeward. We made short trips all the night long.  
On Saturday, September the Fourth, about break of day, we saw the ship again, at the distance of a League, more or less, and not above a mile to windward of us. They stood out assoon as they espied us, and we stood directly after them. Having pursued them for several hours, about four of the clock in the Afternoon, we came up within the distance of half our small Arms shot, to windward of them. Hereupon they perceiving who we were, presently lowered all their Sails at once, and we cast dice among ourselves for the first entrance. The lot sell to larboard; so that twenty men belonging to that watch, entered her. In the Vessel were found Fifty packs of Cacao-nut, such as Chocolate is made of, many packs of Raw-silk, Indian cloth, 
The Prize taken.  and Thred-stockings; these things being the principal part of her Cargo. We stood out S. W. by S. all the night following.  
The next day being come, we transported on board our ship the chiefest part of her lading. In her hold we found some Rigging, as had been told us by Nicholas Moreno our Pilot, taken in the former Vessel off of Guayaquil: but the greatest part of the Hold was full of Timber. We took out of her also some Osenbriggs, of which we made Top-gallant sails, as shall be said hereafter. It was now nineteen days, as they told us, since they set sail from Guyaquil; and then they had only heard there of our Exploits before Panama, but did not so much as think of our coming so far to the Southward, which did not give them the least suspicion of us, though they had seen us for the space of two or three days before at Sea, and always steering after them; otherwise they had made for the land, and endeavoured to escape our hands.  
The next morning likewise we continued to take in the remaining part of what goods we desired out of our Prize. 
They turn away many prisoners.  When we had done, we sent most of our Prisoners on board the said vessel, and left only their sore-mast standing, all the rest being cut down by the board. We gave them a foresail to sail withal; all their own water, and some of our flour to serve them for Provisions; and thus we turned them away, as not caring to be troubled or encumbered with too many of their company. Notwithstanding we detained still several of the chiefest of our prisoners. Such were Don Thomas de Argandona, who was Commander of the vessel taken before Guayaquil; Don Christoval, and Don Baltazar, both Gentlemen of Quality taken with him; Captain Peralta, Captain Juan Moreno, the Pilot, and twelve slaves, of whom we intended to make good use, to do the drudgery of our ship. At this time I reckoned that we were about the distance of thirty five Leagues, little more or less from Land. Moreover, by an observation made this day, we found Lat. 7. d. 1. S. Our plunder being over, and our Prize turned away, we sold both Chests, Boxes, and several other things at the Mast, by the voice of a Crier.  
On the following day we stood S. S. W. and S. W. by S. all day long. 
One of their company dyeth  That day one of our company died, named Robert Montgomery, being the same man who was shot by the negligence of one of our own men with a Pistol through the leg, at the taking of the vessel before Guayaquil, as was mentioned above. We had an observation also this day, by which we now found Lat. 7. d. 26. S. On the same day likewise we made a dividend, and shared all the booty taken in the last Prize. 
They make a dividend.  This being done, we hoist into our ship the Launch which we had taken in her, as being useful unto us. All these days last passed, it was observed, 
An observation of these S●as.  that we had every morning a dark cloud in the sky; the which in the North Sea would certainly foretell a storm; but here it always blew over.  
Wednesday September the eighth in the morning, we threw our dead man abovementioned into the Sea, 
They 〈…〉 at Sea.  and gave him three French Volleys for his Funeral-Ceremony. In the night before this day, we saw a light belonging to some vessel at sea. But we stood away from it, as not desiring to see any more sails to hinder us in our voyage towards Arica, whither now we were designed. This Light was undoubtedly from some ship to Leeward of us; but on the next morning we could descry no sail. Here I judged we had made a S. W. by S. way from Paita, and by an observation found 8. d. 00▪ S.   

CHAP. XIII. A continuation of their long and tedious Voyage to Arica, with a description of the Coasts and Sailing thereunto. Great hardship they endured for want of Water and other Provisions. They are descried at Arica, and dare not land there; the Country being all in Arms before them. They retire from thence, and go unto Puerto de Hilo, close by Arica. Here they land, take the Town with little or no loss on their side, refresh themselves with Provisions; but in the end are cheated by the Spaniards, and forced shamefully to retreat from thence.  
ON September the Ninth we continued still to make a S. W. by S. way, as we had done the day before. By a clear and exact observation taken the same day, we found now Lat. 8. d. 12 S. All the twenty four hours last passed afforded us but little wind, 
Calms.  so that we advanced but as little on our Voyage, and were forced to tack about every four or five hours.  
The next day by another observation taken, we found then Lat. 9 d. 00. Now the weather was much warmer than before; 
Warm weather again.  and with this warmth we had small and misty rains that frequently fell. That evening a strong breeze came up at S. E. by E.  
The night following likewise we had a very great dew that fell, and a fresh wind continued to blow. At this time we were all hard at work to make small sails of the Osenbrigs we had taken in the last Prize, 
They make sail● at Sea.  as being much more convenient for its lightness. The next morning being Saturday, September the 11th, we lay by to mend our rigging. These last twenty four hours we had made a S. by W. way. And now we had an observation that gave us Lat. 10. D. 9 S. I supposed this day that we were West from Cosmey about the distance of eighty nine leagues and an half.  
September the 12th. This day we reckoned a S. S. W. way; and that we had made thirty four leagues and three quarters or thereabouts. Also that all our Westing from Pa●●a was eighty four leagues. We supposed ourselves now to be in Lat. 11. D. ●0. S. But the weather being hasey, no observation could be made.  
September the 13th, yesterday in the Afternoon we had a great Eclipse of the Sun, 
A great Eclipse of the Sun.  which lasted from one of the clock till three after dinner. From this Eclipse I then took the true judgement of our longitude from the Canary Islands, and found myself to be 285 D. 35. in Lat. 11 D. 45 S. The wind was now so fresh, that we took in our Top sails; making a great way under our Courses and Spritsail.  
September the 14th we had a cloudy morning, which continued so all the first part thereof. 
 About eight it cleared up, and then we set our fore-top-sail; and, about noon, our main-top-sail likewise. This was observable, that all this great wind precedent did not make any thing of a great Sea. We reckoned this day that we had run by a S. W. by W. way, twenty six Leagues, and two thirds.  
The next day, in like manner, we had close weather, such as the former morning. Our reckoning was Twenty four Leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by W. way. But, by observation made, I found myself to be 23 D. Southward of my reckoning, as being in the Lat. of 15 D. 17 South.  
On the 16th, we had but small and variable winds. For the twenty four hours last passed we reckoned twenty four leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by S. way. By observation we had Lat. 16. D. 41. That evening we had a gale at E. S. E. which forced us to hand our topsails.  
The 17th likewise, we had many gusts of wind at several times, forcing us to hand our topsails often. But in the forenoon, we set them with a fresh gale at E. S. E. My reckoning this day was thirty one leagues by a S.S. W. way. All day long we stood by our topsails.  
On the 18th, we made a S. by W. way. We reckoned ourselves to be in Lat. 19 D. 33. S. The weather was hasey; and the wind began to die this day by degrees.  
The next day, being the 19th, we had very small wind. I reckoned thirteen leagues and an half, by a S. W. by S. way; and our whole Westing from Paita to be 164 leagues in Lat. 20. D. 06. S. All the afternoon we had a calm, with drizzling rain.  
Monday, September the 20th. Last night we saw the Magallan Clouds, 
Magallan Clouds.  which are so famous among the Mariners of these Southern Seas. The least of these clouds was about the bigness of a man's hat. After this sight, the morning was very clear. We had run at noon at E. S. E thirteen leagues and an half: and, by an observation then made, we found Lat. 20. D. 15. S. This day the wind began to freshen at W. by S. Yet notwithstanding we had a very smooth Sea.  
But on the next morning, the wind came about to S.W. and yet slacken by degrees. At four this morning it came to S. by E. And at ten the same day, to S. E. by S. We had this day a clear observation, and by it Lat. 20. D. 25. S. We stood now E by N. with the wind at S. E.  
September the 22d. This morning the wind was at E. S. E. By a clear observation we found Lat 19 D. 30 S. Likewise on a N. E. by E. way,— and two leagues and two thirds.  
September the 23d we had a fresh wind, and a high 〈◊〉. This morning early the wind was at E. and about 〈◊〉 E. N. E. From a clear observation we found our latitude to be 20 D. 35 S. The way we made was S. by W. That morning we happened to split our Spritsail.  
Next morning the wind was variable and inconstant, and the weather but hasey. We reckoned a S. by E. way: this day we bent a new main-top-sail; the old one serving for a fore-top-sail. In the afternoon we had but little wind, whereupon we lowered our topsails; having, in like manner, a very smooth sea.  
The following day likewise brought us calm and warm weather; which occasioned us to set up our shrouds both fore and aft. An observation taken this day afforded us Lat. 21. D. 57 That evening we bent a spritsail.  
On September the 26th, an observation gave us Lat. 22. D. 05. S. At noon we had a breeze at N. N. E. our course being E. S. E. In the afternoon we set up a larboard topsail studden-sail. In the evening the wind came about at North pretty fresh.  
The next day we had a smooth sea, and took in four studden-sails. For yesterday in the afternoon we had put out, besides that abovementioned, another studden-sail, and two main studden-sails more. This day we had by observation 22 D. 45 S. having made by an E. S. E. way, thirty five leagues and an half. Our whole Merid. differ. sixty eight leagues and an half.  
September the 28th, all the forenoon we had very little wind, and yet withal a great Southern sea. By observation we had Lat. 22 D. 40 S.  
September the 29th. All the night passed we had much wind, with three or four fierce showers of rain. This was the first that we could call rain, 
Much rain.  ever since that we left Cape Francisco abovementioned. This day our allowance was shortened, and reduced unto three pints and a half of water, and one cake of boiled bread to each man for a day. 
Their allowance shotned again.  An observation this day gave us Lat. 21 D. 59 S. by a N. E. by E. way.  
On September the 30th we had a cloudy day, and the wind very variable, the morning being fresh. Our way was N. E. half N. wherein we made eighteen leagues.  
October the First. All the night past and this day we had a cloudy sky, and not much wind. We made a N. E. by E. way, and by it seventeen leagues and two miles. 
Their allowance still shortens.  This day we began at two pints and a half of water for a day.  
The Second, we made a E.N. E. way, and by it twenty six leagues, more or less. Our observation this day gave us Lat. 20 D. 29 S. I reckoned now that we were ten leagues and an half to East of our Meridian, the Port of Paita; so that henceforward our departure was Eastward. The wind was this day at S. E. by S.  
On the Third we had both a cloudy morning, a high sea, and drizzling weather. An observation which we had this day, gave us Lat. 19 D. 45 S. In the afternoon the wind blew so fresh, as that we were forced to hand our topsails and spritsail.  
The 4th likewise we had a high sea and a cold wind. At break of day we set our topsails. An observation made afforded us Lat. 19 D. 8 S. Here we supposed ourselves fifty nine leagues D. M.  
The 5th we had still a great sea, and sharp and cold winds, forcing us to our low sails. By a N. E. by E way, we reckoned this day twenty six leagues and an half.  
But on the 6th we had great gusts of wind. Insomuch, that this morning our ring-bolts gave way which held our Main-stay, and had like to have brought our Mainmast by the board. 
Their Mainmast in danger.  Hereupon we ran three or four glasses West before the wind. By an observation we found Lat. 19 D. 4 S.  
On the 7th of October the wind was something fallen. We had both a cloudy day and variable winds.  
The 8th of the said Month we had again a smooth sea, and small whistling winds. 
Water-snakes and Seals.  This morning we saw a huge shoal of fish, two or three Water-snakes, and several Seals.  
On the next day we had in like manner a very smooth sea, and withal a cloudy day. Our course was East.  
October the Tenth, we had likewise a cloudy day, with small and variable winds▪ and what is consequent unto these, a smooth Sea. Our way was S. by E. This day we espied sloating upon the Sea, 
〈◊〉 of sea-grass.  several Tufts of Sea-grass, which gave us good hopes that we were not far from shore. In the afternoon we had a N. E. by E. wind that sprang up▪ the night was very cold and cloudy.  
On the eleventh we had a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S.E. together with a cloudy day; such as we had experimented for several days before. We reckoned this day thirty two Leagues by a N. E. by E. way. Here our Pilot told us, that the sky is always hasey nigh the shore upon these Coasts where we now were. 
A 〈◊〉 sky 〈…〉.   
On October the 12th we had a clear day, and a North-East way.  
The 13th we had but little wind. This day we saw a Whale, 
 which we took for an infallible token that we were not far distant from Land, which now we hoped to see in a few days. We made an E.S.E. way, and by it we reckoned nineteen Leagues. All the evening was very calm.  
Thursday October the 14th we had both a calm, and close day until the afternoon. Then the weather became very hot and clear. This day we saw several land-Fowls, being but small Birds. 
 Concerning which our Pilot said, that they use to appear about one or two days sail from the Land. Our reckoning was eleven Leagues by an E.S.E. way. In the evening of this day we thought that we had seen Land; but it proved to be nothing else than a foggy bank.  
October the 15th, both the night past, and this day, was very clear. We made an observation this day, which gave us Lat. 18 d. 00 South.  
The 16th, last night and this day were contrary to the former, both cloudy. Our way was N.E. by E. whereof we reckoned thirteen Leagues.  
Sunday October the 17th the wind blew very fresh, our course being E. N. E. 
 About five that morning we saw Land; but the weather was so hasey, that at first we could scarce perceive whether it was Land or not. It was distant from us about eight Leagues, and appeared as a high and round hill, being in form like unto a Sugar-loaf. We saw Land afterwards all along to the S. E. by E. from it. In the evening, we being then within five Leagues of the shore, the Land appeared very high and steep.  
October the 18th, all the night last passed we stood off to sea with a fresh wind. This morning we could just see Land at N. N. E. We reckoned a S. E. by E. way; and by observation we found Lat. 17 d. 17 South.  
Tuesday October the 19th, we had very cloudy weather, finding what our Pilot had told us to be very true, 
Highlands 〈◊〉 Arica.  concerning the haseyness of this shore. We saw all along as we went very high Land, covered with Clouds; insomuch, that we could not see its top.  
On Wednesday the next day, we had likewise cloudy weather, and for the most part calm. The same weather being very cloudy, as before, continued in like manner on Thursday.  
Friday October 22. this morning we saw the Land plain before us. Our Pilot being asked what Land that was, 
Punta de Hilo.  answered, it was the Point of Hilo. At N.N.E. and about six or seven League's distance it appeared thus unto us.  
Punta de HILO. Lat. 18. d. 4. S.  
There is every morning and evening a brightness over the Point, which lasteth for two or three hours, being caused by the reflection of the Sun on the barren land, as it is supposed. This day we had but little wind; and the huge want of water we were now under, 
Great want of water.  occasioned much disturbance among our men. As for my part, I must acknowledge I could not sleep all night long through the greatness of my drought. We could willingly have landed here to seek for water; but the fear of being discovered and making ourselves known, hindered us from so doing. Thus we unanimously resolved to endure our thirst for a little longer space of time. Hereabouts is a small Current that runneth under the shore. This morning we had but little wind at South, our course being E S. E. The Point at the distance of five leagues N. E. looketh on the following side, thus:  
Punta de HILO.  
Our wind continued to blow not above six hours each day. We reckoned the difference of our Meridian to be this day one hundred and eighty leagues. Very great was our affliction now for want of water; 
Hal● a p●nt a day.  we having but half a pint a day to our allowance.  
October the 23 d. This day we were forced to spare one measure of water, thereby to make it hold out the longer; so scarce it became with us. At three this afternoon the Point looked thus:  
Punta de HILO. Mora de SAMA.  
Here the Point looketh like unto an Island. And Mora de Sama, to the Southward thereof, giveth this appearance:  
Mora de SAMA.  
About nine of the clock at night we had a land wind, and with it we stood S. E. by S. But all the night after we had but little wind.  
October the 24th. All the night passed we had very cloudy and dark weather, with mizling rain. The morning being come, it cleared up; but all the land appeared covered with clouds. Yet notwithstanding in the afternoon it gave us again this appearance.  
Mora de SAMA. Lat. 18 d. 29 S.  
Under the Hill of Mora de Sama are eighteen or nineteen white cliffs; which appear in the form above described. 
 This day we resolved that One hundred and twelve men should go ashore. And about eight this evening, we sent our Launch and four Canoas', with fourscore men, to take three or four Fishermen at a certain River, close by Mora de Sama, called el Rio de Juan Diaz, with intent to gain what intelligence we could how affairs stood at present on the Coast and Country thereabouts.  
Monday October the 25th. Last night being about the distance of one league and an half from shore, we sounded, and found forty five fathom water, with an hard ground at the bottom. This morning our people and Canoas' that were sent to take the Fishermen, 
 returned, not being able to find either their houses or the River. They reported withal, they had had a very fresh wind all the night long under shore, whereas we had not one breath of wind all night on board.  
Tuesday October the 26th. Last night, being the night before this day, about six of the clock, we departed from the ship to go to take Arica, resolving to land about the distance of a league to windward of the Town. 
 We were about six leagues distant from the Town when we left our ship▪ whereby we were forced to row all night, that we might reach before day the place of our landing. Towards morning, the Canoa●s l●●t the Launch, which they had had all night in a Tow, and wherein I was; and made all the speed they possibly could for the shore, with design to land before the Launch could arrive. But being come nigh the place where we designed to land, they found, to our great sorrow and vexation, that we were descried; and that all along the shore, and through the Country, they had certain news of our arrival. Yet notwithstanding our discovery, we would have landed, if we could by any means have found a place to do it in. But the sea ran so high, and with such a force against the rocks, that our boats must needs have been staved each in one thousand pieces, and we in great danger of wetting our arms, if we should adventure to go on shore. The Bay all round was possessed by several parties of horse; and likewise the tops of the hills, which seemed to be gathered there by a general alarm through the whole Country, and that they waited only for our landing, with design to make a strong opposition against us. They fired a gun at us, but we made them no answer, but rather returned to our ship, giving over this enterprise until a fairer opportunity. The hill of Arica is very white, being occasioned by the dung of multitudes of Fowls that nest themselves in the hollow thereof. 
Hill of Arica  To Leeward of the said Hill lieth a small Island, at the distance of a mile, more or less, from the shore. About half a league from that Island, we could perceive six ships to ride at anchor: four of which had their Yards taken down from their Masts; but the other two seemed to be ready for sail. We asked our Pilot concerning these ships, and he told us that one of them was mounted with six guns, and the other with only four. Being disappointed of our expectations at Arica, we now resolved to bear away from thence to the Village of Hilo, 
They 〈◊〉 away for Hilo.  there to take in Water and other Provisions; as also to learn what intelligence we could obtain. All that night we lay under a calm.  
On October the 27th in the morning, we found ourselves to be about a league to windward of Mora de Sama. Yet notwithstanding the weather was quite calm, and we only drived with the current at Leeward. The land between Hilo and Mora de Sama formeth two several Bays, and the Coast runneth along N.W. and S.E. as may appear by the following demonstration. Over the land we could see from our ship, as we drove the coming or rising of a very high land, at a great distance far up in the Country.  
October the 28th. The night before this day, we sent away our four Canoas' with fifty men in them, 
 to seize and plunder the Town of Hilo. All the day was very calm, as the day before.  
The next morning about break of day, we had a fair breeze sprang up, with which we lay right in with the Port. 
〈◊〉 price at the Port.  About one in the afternoon we anchored, and the Port lieth thus, as is here described.  
Port of HILO.  
We cast anchor at the distance of two miles from the Village: and then we perceived two flags, which our men had put out, 
●he Town taken.  having taken the Town, and set up our English Colours. The Spaniards were retreated unto the hills, and there had done the same. Being come to an anchor, our Commander Captain Sharp sent a Canoa on board of us, and ordered that all the men our ship could spare, should come ashore. Withal they told us, that those of our party that landed the morning before, were met by some horsemen on the shore, who only exchanged some few volly's of shot with our men, but were soon put to slight. That hereupon our forces had marched directly to the Town, where the Spaniards expecting we would have landed at first, made a breast-work, thirty paces long, of clay and banks of sand. Here, in a small skirmish, we happened to kill an Indian, who told us before he died, that they had received news of our coming, nine days ago, from Lima, and but one day before from Arica. Having taken the Town, we found therein great quantity of Pitch, Tar, Oil, Wine and Flower, with several other sorts of provisions. We endeavoured to keep as good a watch as the Spaniards did on the hills, fearing lest they should suddenly make any attempt to destroy us.  
On the next day, being October the 30th, we chose out threescore men of them who were the fittest to march, 
They search the valley.  among the rest; and ordered them to go up and search the valley adjoining and belonging to the Town. We found the said valley to be very pleasant, being all over set with Figtrees, Olive-trees, Orange, Lemmon, and Lime-trees, with many other fruits agreeable to the Palat. About four miles up within the valley, we came to a great Sugar-work, or Ingenio de azucar, as it is called by the Spaniards, where we found great store of Sugar, Oil, and Molossus. But most of the Sugar, the owners had hidden from us in the cane itself. As we marched up the valley, the Spaniards marched along the hills, and observed our motion. From the tops of the hills they often tumbled down great stones upon us, but with great care we endeavoured to escape those dangers, and but the report of one Gun would suddenly cause them all to hid their heads. From this house, I mean the Sugar-work abovementioned, Mr. Cox, myself, and one Cannis a Dutchman (who was then our Interpreter) went unto the Spaniards with a flag of Truce. They met us very civilly, 
They agree with the Spaniards.  and promised to give us fourscore Beefs for the Ransom of the Sugar-work, and upon condition that it should not be spoiled nor demolished. With them we agreed, that they should be delivered unto us at the Port, the next day at noon. Hereupon Captain Sharp in the evening sent down unto the Port twenty men, with strict orders that our forces there should offer no violence in the least unto those that brought down the Beefs.  
Sunday, October the 31st. This day being employed in casting up some accounts belonging to our Navigation, I reckoned that Hilo was to the Eastward of Paita, one hundred eighty and seven leagues. This morning the Captain of the Spaniards came unto our Commander Captain Sharp, with a flag of Truce; and told him, that sixteen Beefs were already sent down unto the Port, and that the rest should certainly be there the next morning. Hereupon we were ordered to prepare ourselves to retreat, and march back unto the Port, and there embark ourselves on board our ship. My advice was to the contrary, that we should rather leave twenty men behind to keep the house of the Sugar-work, and that others should possess themselves of the Hills, thereby to clear them of the Spaniards and their look out. But my counsel not being regarded, each man took away what burden of Sugar he pleased, and thus we returned unto our vessel. 
〈…〉 to 〈◊〉 double dealing in the enemy.  Being come there, we found no Beefs had been brought down at all, which occasioned us much to suspect some double dealing would in the latter end be found in this case.  
The next morning being November the first, our Captain went unto the top of the Hills aforementioned, and spoke with the Spaniards themselves, 
 concerning the performance of their agreement. The Spaniards made answer, that the Cattle would certainly come down this night. But in case it did not, that the Master or Owner of the Sugar-work was now returned from Potosi, and we might go up and treat with him, and make, if we pleased, a new bargain for the preservation of his House and Goods; whose interest it was, more than theirs, to save it from being demolished. With this answer our men returned unto us, and we concluded to expect until the next day for the delivery of the Beefs.  
On the following day about eight in the morning, there came in unto us a Flag of Truce from the enemy, telling us, 
 that the winds were so high, that they could not drive the Cattle, otherwise they had been delivered before now. But withal, that by noon we should in no manner ●ail to have them brought unto us. Noon being come, and no Cattle appearing, we now having filled our water, and finished other concerns, resolved to be revenged on the Enemy, and do them what mischief we could; at least, by setting fire on the Sugar-work. Hereupon, threescore men of us marched up the valley, 
They burn the sugar-work  and burned both the House, the Canes, and the Mill belonging to the Ingenio. We broke likewise the Coppers, Clogs, and multitudes of great Jars of Oil that we found in the house. This being done, we brought away more Sugar, and returned unto the Port over the Hills or Mountains; the which we sound to be very pleasant, smooth, and levelly after once we had ascended them. It fell out very fortunately unto us that we returned back this way we did, for otherwise our men at the Seaside had inevitably been cut off and torn in pieces by the enemy, they being at that time dispersed and straggling up and down by two and three in a Party. For from the Hills we espied coming from the Northward of the Bay, above three hundred horsemen, 
Three hundred Horse coming against the●  all riding at full speed towards our men, who had not as yet descried them, and little thought of any such danger from the enemy so nigh at hand. Being alarmed with this sight, we threw down what Sugar we had, and ran incontinently to meet them▪ thereby to give our other men time to rally, and put themselves into a posture of defence. We being in good rank and order, fairly proffered them Battle upon the Bay; but as we advanced to meet them, they retired and rid towards the Mountains to surround us, and take the Rocks from us if possibly they could. Hereupon, perceiving their intentions, we returned back and possessed ourselves of the said Rocks, and also the lower Town; as the Spaniards themselves did of the upper Town (at the distance of half a mile from the lower) the Hills and the Woods adjoining thereunto. The Horsemen being now in possession of these Quarters, we could perceive, as far as we could see, more and more men resort unto them, so that their Forces increased hourly to considerable numbers. We fired one at another as long as we could reach, and the day would permit. But in the mean while we observed, that several of them rid unto the Watch-hill, and looked out often to the Sea-board. This gave us occasion to fear, that they had more strength and Forces coming that way, which they expected every minute. Hereupon, lest we should speed worse than we had done before, we resolved to embark silently in the dark of the night, 
 and go off from that Coast where we had been so early descried, and the enemy was so much prepared against us. We carried off a great Chest of Sugar, whereof we shared seven pound weight and a half each man; 
What they got at Hilo.  thirty Jars of Oil, and great plenty of all sorts of Garden Herbs, Roots, and most excellent Fruit.   

CHAP. XIV. The Bucaniers depart from the Port of Hilo, and sail unto that of Coquimbo. They are descried before their arrival. Notwithstanding they land: are encountered by the Spaniards, and put them to flight. They take, plunder, and fire the City of la Serena. A description thereof. A Stratagem of the Spaniards in endeavouring to fire their ship, discovered and prevented. They are deceived again by the Spaniards, and forced to retire from Coquimbo, without any Ransom for the City, or considerable pillage. They release several of their chiefest Prisoners.  
A Description of Hilo  
November the fourth in the morning, we saw the Port of Hilo at E.N.E. at the distance of nine Leagues, 
A great reflection.  more or less from the Land. The white sand giveth a bright reflection over the land; the which we could see after we had lost the sight of the land itself.  
The next day unto this, we had an indifferent fresh wind at S.S.E. We reckoned a S. W. half west way, and by it, that we had made twenty Leagues. The day was very fair and sun-shiny, and the sea very smooth  
November the 6th, we had a clear night the last past, and the day proved very fair and clear, like unto the former. We reckoned by a S. W. by W. way, about twenty one leagues. In the afternoon it was almost stark calm.  
On the following day we had in like manner very little wind, no more than the last twenty four hours. 
They are troubled with the Survey.  We were now about this time many of us very much troubled and diseased with the Survey. It proceeded as we judged, from the great hardship and want of Provisions which we had endured for several Months past, as having had only bread and water, as was mentioned above. Only at Hilo we killed a Mule, 
At Hilo they eat a Mule.  which gave unto those who would eat of the flesh, a very good meal, as we esteemed it, the Spaniards having swept away with them all other provisions of flesh. But there we had plundered some small quantity of good Chocolate, 
Chocolate.  whereof the Spaniards make infinite use. So that now we had each morning a dish of that pleasant liquor, containing almost a pint.  
Next day likewise we had very little wind, as before. We made an observation this day, and found Lat. 20. d. 05. South.  
November the Ninth we had still very little wind, and that variable. We took almost every hour an observation, and found ourselves to be in the Lat. of 20 d. 18. South.  
The 10th we had in like manner but little wind, as for so many days before. We observed an E.S.E. current, or nearest unto it, to run hereabouts. This day we saw the homing of a very high land, which much admired us, for at this time I conceived we could not be less than thirty five or forty leagues distant from land. 
They descry land.  We supposed it to be Mora Tarapaca. That day we set up our shrouds.  
Upon the 11th an indifferent gale of wind sprang up at S. W. by S. by which we made twenty five Leagues, 
B●t are d●c●i●ed.  and one third. We had now a great S.S.W. sea. In the night the wind as we experimented, came one or two points from the land. This morning we saw the like homing of land, whereby we were made sensible it was no land, that which we had seen the day before.  
On the 12th we had several mists of rain, with windy weather. We made by a S. S. W. half S. way, twenty five leagues and one third. We had likewise a great and rolling S. S. W. sea, as the day before.  
The 13th of the said Month, we had both cloudy and misty weather. We made a S. S. W. and one quarter S. way; by which we ran fifty leagues.  
But the next day, fair and clear weather came about again. We had likewise an ●●sie gale of wind, by which we made a S. W. way, and advanced twenty two leagues and an half.  
On the 15th of November, we had also clear weather, and an indifferent gale of wind. Our way was S. W. by W. by which we reckoned eighteen leagues. Likewise that our Westing from Hilo, from whence we set forth, was one hundred and fourteen leagues, and one third. Our latitude by observation we found to be 23 D. 25 S. 
The Table of Lima used by the Author.  I to●k now the Declination-Table used and made by the Cosmographer of Lima.  
Tuesday, November the 16th. In the night last passed, we had a shower or two of rain. This day we made an observation, by which we found Lat. 23 D. 35 S.  
The 17th we made a S. W. by W. half S. way. By observation we found Lat. 23 D. 46 S. with very little wind.  
The 18th, upon a S. W. by W. way, we made twenty one leagues. By observation we found Lat. 24 D. 20 South.  
Friday, Nou. the 19th, 1680. This morning, about an hour before day, we observed a Comet to appear, 
A Comet seen.  a degree N. from the bright in Libra. The body thereof seemed dull; and its tail extended itself eighteen or twenty degrees in length, being of a pale colour, and pointing directly N. N. W. Our prisoners hereupon reported unto us, 
Strange sights seen in the A●.  that the Spaniards had seen very strange sights▪ both at Lima, the capital City of Peru, Guayaquil, and other places, much about the time of ●ur coming into the South Seas. I reckoned this day we had ran twenty leagues by a S. W. way.  
The following day, unto the appearance of the Comet, we had many storms of wind at S.S.E. and at E. S. E. 
What followed the Comet.  Our reckoning by a S. W. by W. way, was twenty two leagues.  
Sunday, November the 21th, we had likewise many gusts of wind, such as the day before, with frequent showers of rain. The wind varied to and fro, according as the Clouds drew it here and there. We reckoned a S. S. W. way, and by it twenty one leagues and a half. In all. West from Hilo, we judged ourselves to be one hundred seventy eight leagues and two thirds. We had this day a great S. W. Sea, and cloudy weather. I supposed our Latitude to be 26 D. 53 S.  
November the 22d we had in like manner cloudy weather, and now but little wind. We reckoned a S. way, and fifty one leagues.  
The 23d we had very little wind, all the storm, after the appearance of the Comet, 
 being now quite allayed. We reckoned we had made a S. E. by E. way; and found our latitude, by observation, to bare 27 D. 46 S.  
Wednesday, November the 24th. All the twenty four hours last passed, we had a N. W. wind. Our way was S E. half S. by which we reckoned thirty one leagues and one third.  
The 25th. Last night the wind blew at W. S. W. but this morning it came about again at N. W. as the day before. Our reckoning this day was a S. E. and one quarter E. way, twenty nine leagues and one third Our Latitude now, by observation made this day, was 39 D. 57 S. Our difference of Merid. 13 5⅓.  
November the 26th. In the night the wind started to S. S. W. But this day at noon we had little better than a calm. I reckoned an E.S.E. half E. way, and by it twenty three leagues.  
Saturday the 27th. Yesterday in the evening the wind came to S. I reckoned an East, and something Southerly way, and by that, twenty three leagues, as the day before this.  
November the 28th. All the twenty four hours last passed we enjoyed a fresh wind at S. S E. having a high S. W. sea. Our reckoning was an E. by N. and half N. way, and withal twenty four leagues. By observation, we found Lat. 30 D. 16 S. and Meridian distance eighty eight leagues. At noon the wind came at S. half E.  
On the 29th we had a very great S. W. sea; and withal cloudy weather. My reckoning was by an E. one third S. way, twenty leagues and one third. This day we happened to see two or three great fowls flying in the air. 
Great fowls.  Concerning which our Pilot told us, that they used to appear seventy or eighty leagues off from the Island, called of Juan Fernandez. The day before this, Captain Peralta our prisoner, was taken very much frantic, 
Captain Peralta taken frantic.  his distemper being occasioned, as we thought, through too much hardship and melancholy. Notwithstanding, this present day he became indifferent well again.  
The following day we had likewise cloudy weather. We made, according to our account, an E. half N. way, and by it sixteen leagues and two thirds. Our Meridian difference fifty two leagues.  
The first of December we had hasey weather, and withal an indifferent good wind at S. yea, sometimes S. by W. Our way was E. by S. by which we reckoned twenty two leagues. The night before this day, we sailed over white water like banks, of a mile in length, or more. But these banks, upon examination, 
Huge shoals of Anchovas.  we found to be only great shoals of Anchovas.  
On December the second, very early in the morning, we espied Land, 
They s●e land.  the which appeared to be very high About noon this day we were at six leagues distance from it. All the preceding night we had so much wind, that we were forced to make use only of a pair of courses. By an observation made this day, we found Lat. 30. d. 35. South. We went away largely, driving better than nine leagues every watch. With this wind we made all the Sail we possibly could, designing by this means to get into Coquimbo, 
Bay of Coquimbo.  upon which Coast we now were before night. But the wind was so high, that sometimes we were forced to lower all our sail, it blowing now a mere fret of wind. Towards the evening it abated by degrees; insomuch, that at midnight it was stark calm ag●●●. At that time we hoist out our Launch and Canoas', and putting into them one hundred men, we rowed away from the ship, with design to take by surprisal a considerable City, situated nigh unto the Coast, called by the Spaniards, la Ciudad de la Serena.  
Friday December the third, 1680. when we departed from the ship, 
They land and take the City of la Serena.  we had above two leagues, more or less, to row unto the shore. But as it happened, the Launch (wherein I was) rowed so heavy, in comparison to the Canoas', that we could not keep pace with the said Boats. For this reason▪ and no other, it was broad day before we got unto a certain Storehouse, situate upon the shore; the which we found our men had passed by in the dark of the night, without perceiving it. They being landed, immediately marched away from their Canoas', towards the City aforementioned of la Serena. But they had not proceeded far on their march, when they found, to the great sorrow and chagrin of us all, that we were timely discovered here also, as we had been at the other two places before, to wit, Arica and Hilo. For as they marched in a body together, being but thirty five men in all, who were all those that were landed out of the Canoas', they were suddenly encountered and engaged by a whole Troop of an hundred Spanish horse. We that were behind hearing the noise of the dispute, 
They rout the Spanish horse.  followed them at their heels, and made all the hast we possibly could to come up to their relief. But before we could reach the place of the Battle, they had already routed the Spaniards, and forced them to fly away towards the Town.  
Notwithstanding this rout given unto the horse, they rallyed again, 
A Stratagem of the Enemy.  at the distance of about a mile from that place, and seemed as if they did wait for us, and would engage us anew. But as soon as all our Forces were come together, whereof we could make but fourscore and eight men in all, the rest being left behind to guard the Boats, we marched towards them and offered them Battle. As we came nigh unto them we clearly found they designed no such thing; for they instantly retired and rid away before us, keeping out of the reach of our guns. We followed them as they rid, being led by them designedly clear out of the road that went unto the Town, that we might not reach nor find it so soon. In this engagement with the horse, our company had killed three of their chiefest men, and wounded four more; killing also four of their horses. When we found that we had been led by this stratagem of the enemy, out of the way of the Town, we left the Bay, and crossed over the green fields to find it; wading oftentimes over several branches of water, which there serve to enclose each plot of ground. Upon this march we came unto several houses, but found them all empty, and swept clean both of inhabitants and provisions. We saw likewise several horses and other heads of cattle in the fields, as we went along towards the City. This place of la Serena, 
La Serena a considerable City.  our Pilot had reported unto us to be but a small Town; but being arrived there, we found in it no fewer than seven great Churches and one Chapel belonging thereunto. Four of these Churches were Monasteries or Convents, and each Church had its Organs for the performance of Divine Service. Several of the houses had their Orchards of Fruit, and Gardens, belonging unto them; both Houses and Gardens being as well and as neatly furnished, as those in England. In these Gardens we found Strawberries as big as Walnuts, 
Huge Strawberries.  and those verg delicious to the taste. In a word, every thing in this City of la Serena, was most excellent and delicate, and far beyond what we could expect in so remote a place. The Town was inhabited by all sorts of Tradesmen, and besides them, had its Merchants, some of which were accounted to be very rich.  
The Inhabitants of la Serena, upon our approach and discovery, were all fled, 
The Inhabitants all fled.  carrying with them whatsoever was most precious of their goods and jewels, or less cumbersome unto them. Much of their valuable things they had likewise concealed or buried, as having had time since we were first discovered, so to do. Besides that they had had forewarning enough how to beware of us, sent them over land from Arica, and several other places where we had landed or been descried at Sea. Notwithstanding, we took in the Town one Friar, and two Chileno's, or Spaniard's natives of the Kingdom of Chile, which adjoineth unto that of Peru, towards the Straight of Magallanes. These Prisoners related unto us, that the Spaniards, when they heard of our coming, had killed most of their Chilean slaves, fearing lest they should run or revolt from them unto us. Moreover, that we had been descried from their Coasts four days before our arrival, or descent upon land; all the which time they had employed in carrying away their Plate and Goods. 
 Unto this information they added, that for their defence they had received a supply of sixty men from Arica. Having taken possession of the Town, that evening there came a Negro unto us, running away from the Spaniards. He likewise informed us, that when we were before Panama, we had taken a Negro, who was esteemed to be the best Pilot in all the South-sea; but more especially for this place, and all the Coasts of Coquimbo. Moreover, that if the Spaniards had not sent all the Negro's belonging unto this City farther up into the Country, out of our reach and communication, they would all undoubtedly have revolted unto us.  
That night about midnight our Boatswain, being accompanied by forty men, 
 and having a Chilean for their guide, went out of the Town some miles within the Country, with design to find out the places where the Spaniards lay concealed, and had hid their goods and plate. But before they came, the Spaniards had received intelligence thereof from some secret spies they had in the Town, and both the men and their women were all fled to places that were more occult and remote. So that by this search, they only found an old Indian woman and three children; but no gold nor plate, nor yet any other prisoners. This morning our ship came to an anchor, by the Storehouse abovementioned, named Tortuga, at the distance of a furlong from shore, in the depth of seven fathom water. Mean while we were quartered in the Town, I took this following ground-plot thereof.  
The City of 〈◊〉. Serena. Altitude 30. d. 00. South.  
The next morning, being Saturday, December the 4th, came into the Town a flag of Truce from the Enemy. 
A flag of Truce from the Enemmy.  Their message was to proffer a ransom for the Town to preserve it from burning; for now they began to fear we would set fire unto it, as having found no considerable booty nor pillage therein. The Captains, or chief Commanders of both sides, met about this point, and agreed betwixt them for the sum of 95000 pieces of eight to be the price of the whole ransom. 
95000 pieces of eight promised.  In the afternoon of this day, I was sent down unto the Bay of Coquimbo, with a party of twenty men, to carry thither both goods taken in the Town, and provisions for the ship. It is two leagues and a half from the Town unto the Port; one league on the Bay, the rest being a very great road, which leadeth from the Bay unto the City. The Spaniards promised that the Ransom should be collected and paid in by the next day. This day also there died one of our Negro slaves on board the ship.  
The following day in the morning, I returned back unto the Town, with the men I had brought down the day before. Only six of them I left behind, to look after our Canoa's at the end of the Bay. When I came up into the City, 
The Enemy breaketh his promise.  I found that the Spaniards had broken their promise, and had not brought in the Ransom they had agreed for; but had begged more time until to morrow at eight in the forenoon. This evening another party of our men went down unto the ship, to carry goods, such as we had pillaged in the Town. Moreover, that night about nine of the clock, 
An Earthquake.  happened an Earthquake, the which we were very sensible of, as we were all together in the Church of San Juan, where our chief rendezvous and Corpse du guard was kept. In the night the Spaniards opened a sluice, and let the water run in streams about the Town, with intent either to overflow it, and thereby force us out of the place, or at least that they might the easier quench the flame, in case we should fire the Town.  
On the next morning we set fire to the Town, perceiving it to be overflown, 
They fire the Town.  and that the Spaniards had not performed, or rather that they never designed to perform their promise. We fired, as nigh as we could, every house in the whole Town, to the intent it might be totally reduced into ashes. Thus we departed from la Serena, carrying with us what plunder we could find, having sent two parties before loaded with goods unto the ship, as was mentioned above. As we marched down unto the Bay, we beat up an Ambuscade of two hundred and fifty horse, 
An Ambuscade of the Enemy.  which lay by the way in private, with an intent to fall on our men, in case we had sent down any other party again with goods unto the ship. When we came to the Seaside, being half way unto our ship, we received advice that the Spaniards had endeavoured, by an unusual stratagem, 
A stratagem discovered.  to burn our ship, and by these means destroy us all. They acted thus: They up blew a horses hid like unto a bladder, and upon this float a man ventured to swim from shore, and come under the stern of our ship. Being arrived there, he crammed Okeham and Brimstone, and other combustible matter, between the Rudder and the Stern-post. Having done this, he fired it with a match, so that in a small time our Rudder was on fire, and all the ship in a smoke. Our men both alarmed and amazed with this smoke, ran up and down the ship, suspecting the prisoners to have fired the vessel, thereby to get their liberty and seek our destruction. At last they found it out where the fire was, and had the good fortune to quench it, before its going too far. Assoon as they had put it out, they sent the boat ashore, and found both the hide aforementioned, and the match burning at both ends, whereby they came acquainted with the whole matter. When we came unto the Storehouse on the shoar-side, we set at liberty the Friar our prisoner, and another Gentleman who was become our Hostage for the performance of the Ransom. Moreover, 
They set at liberty their chief prisoners▪  when we came aboard, we sent away and set at liberty Captain Peralta, Don Thomas de Argandona, Don Baltazar, Don Christoval, Captain Juan, the Pilots Mate, the old Moor, and several others of our chiefest prisoners. Unto this releasement of our prisoners we were moved, partly because we knew not well what to do with them, and partly because we feared lest by the example of this stratagem▪ they should plot our destruction in earnest, and by the help of so many men, especially persons of Quality, be able to go through it.   

CHAP. XV. The Bucaniers depart from Coquimbo for the Isle of Juan Fernandez. Anexact account of this Voyage. Misery they endure, and great dangers they escape very narrowly there. They mutiny among themselves, and choose Watling to be their chief Commander. Description of the Island. Three Spanish Men of War meet with the Bucaniers, at the said Island; but these outbrave them on the one side, and give them the slip on the other.  
BEing all embarked again, as was mentioned in the precedent Chapter, the next morning, which was Tuesday, December the 7th, twenty of us were sent ashore to observe the motion of the Enemy. We went unto the look-out, or watch-hill, but from thence could learn nothing. Hereupon▪ about noon we returned on board the ship, and at two in the afternoon, we weighed anchor, and set sail, directing our course for the Isle of Juan Fernandez, not far distant from the Coast of Coquimbo. At night we were five 〈◊〉 distant from thence at N. W. by N. The Souther●●●● Island of those which are called de los Paxaros, or the Islands of Birds, 
 was then N. N. W. from us. Before our departure, I took this following draught of the Bay of Coquimbo, and City of la Serena.  
Coquimbo Bay described  
December the 28th we had but very little wind, and a leeward current here, which we could perceive did heave us to the Northward. The aforementioned Island de los Paxaros, at three in the afternoon, bore N. E of us. At the distance of three leagues, more or less, it appeared thus.  
Isla de los PAXAROS.  
It is distant from the main Continent four leagues, and from the next Island of the same name, about two. The Main is extreme high and mountainous hereabouts. At evening we were West from the said Island five leagues. About eight or nine leagues to Windward of Coquimbo, are certain white cliffs, which appear from the shore to those that are off at Sea. 
White cliffs.   
On the 9th of December we had likewise but little wind, as the day before. I supposed myself this day to be about thirteen leagues West from the Island abovementioned. The weather was cloudy, with misling rain, so that no observation could be taken. 
They are put to an allowance of water.  However, this day it was thought convenient to put us to an allowance of water; for we had taken in little or none at Coquimbo. The same weather, or very like unto it, we had the next day, being the 10th; that is to say, stark calm and cloudy.  
On the 11th of December, we had some small rain in the forepart of the day. 
Calms.  But in the afternoon it cleared up, so that the weather was very hot. We had still but little wind.  
The next day, December the 12th, we had very fair weather, and by a clear observation made this day, we found Lat. 30 D. 06 S.  
December the 13th. By a W. S. W. way, we made forty two leagues. By observation we found Lat. 30 D. 45 S. D. M. four leagues and two thirds.  
On the 14th in the morning, we had a handsome shower of rain, which continued for some while. Then, about eight of the clock, there sprang up a S. S. W. breeze. My reckoning was by an E. S. E. way, fourteen leagues. And by observation, we found this day 30 D. 30 S. 
One of their company dyeth.  In the afternoon of this day, died one of our men, whose name was William Cammock. His disease was occasioned by a furfeit, gained by too much drinking on shore at la Serena; the which produced in him a Calenture, or Malignant Fever, and an Hicup. Thus in the evening we buried him in the Sea, according to the usual custom of Mariners, giving him three French Volleys for his Funeral.  
The following day, we had an indifferent fresh wind on both tacks. Our way was W. S. W. and by it we reckoned thirty four leagues. So likewise by an observation we had Lat. 30 D. 42 S. All the afternoon blew a S. by W. wind very fresh, with a short topping S. W. Sea.  
But on the next ensuing day, we had no small breeze, but rather hard gusts of wind. These grew so high, that they forced us to take in our topsails. We made a S. W. half S. way, and forty five leagues.  
On the 17th we had likewise high winds, and withal a S. W. sea. Our way W. by S. By observation taken this day, we found Lat. 30 D. 51 S. In the afternoon we had a S. S. E. wind, our course being S. W.  
December the 18th. This day we had the same high winds as before, at S. S. E. We reckoned by a W. S. W. way forty five leagues. At noon the wind was something fallen, and then we had some rain.  
The 19th we had both cloudy and windy weather. My reckoning was a S. W. by S. way, and here upon fifty eight miles. Yesterday we were assured by our Pilot, that we were now in the Meridian of the Island of Juan Fernandez, whither our course was directed for that present. What occasioned him to be so positive in his assertion, was the seeing of those great birds, 
Great birds seen again.  of which we made mention in the foregoing Chapter.  
On the 20th, we had cloudy weather in the morning on both tacks. We made a S. W. and half S. way, and by it fifty two leagues. By observation we found this day Lat. 32 D. 20 S. Difference of Meridian was now one hundred and twenty three leagues.  
The next day likewise we had cloudy weather; yet by observation we found a W. way. On the 22d by observation we found and E. way proved.  
Thursday, December the 23d. All the night passed we had a fresh wind. But in the morning, from topmast head, 
They descry land.  we descried a hammock of land. In the evening we saw it again. We found afterwards that what we had seen, was the Westermost Island of Juan Fernandez; which is nothing else but a mere rock, there being no riding, nor scarce landing, near unto it.  
Friday, December the 24th. This morning we could descry the Island itself, 
They see the l●st of Juan Fernandez.  of Juan Fernandez, S. by E. it being at sixteen leagues distance when we saw it yesterday. At seven this morning the Island stood E. the wind being at N. W. by N. At eight the same morning, the Island, at the distance of five leagues, little more or less, appeared thus.  
Isla de JUAN FERNANDEZ.  
Here my observation was, that I could see neither fowl nor fish nigh unto this Island; 
A particular observation.  both which things are usually to be seen about other Islands. Having told my observation unto our Pilot, he gave me for answer, that he had made many Voyages by this Island, and yet never saw any either fowl or fish more than I. Our reckoning this day was an E. S. E. way, and hereby thirty six leagues. Our latitude by observation was found to be 33 D. 30 S.  
Saturday, December the 25th. Yesterday in the afternoon, at three of the clock, we saw the other Island, making two or three hammocks of land. This morning we were about eight leagues distant from it, the Island bearing E. S. E. from us. At eight the same morning, we were right at breast with it. Here therefore are two Islands together, the biggest whereof is three leagues and an half in length, 
Bigness of these Isles.  nearest N. W. and S.E. the other, and lesser, is almost one league, and no more in circumference. At ten of the clock we sent off from the ship one of our canoas, to seek for the best landing and anchoring for our Vessel. As we approached, both Islands seemed unto us nothing but one entire heap of rocks. That which lieth more unto the N. is the highest, though we could not now see the tops thereof for the clouds which covered it. In most places it is so steep, that it becometh almost perpendicular.  
This day being Christmas-day, we gave in the morning early three Volleys of shot, 
Christmas-day.  for solemnisation of that great Festival. I reckoned an E. by S. way. By a clear observation from the middle of the Island, I found here Lat. 33 D. 45 S. and M. D. to be ninty nine leagues. In the evening of this day, we came to an anchor at the South end of the Island, in a stately Bay that we found there, but which lieth open from the South, to the Southeast winds. We anchored in the depth of eleven fathom water, and at the distance of only one furlong from the shore. Here we saw multitudes of Seals covering the Bay every where, insomuch that we were forced to kill them, 
Many Seals.  to set our feet on shore.  
Sunday, December the 26th. This day we sent a Canoa to see if we could find any riding secure from the Southerly winds; these being the most constant winds that blow on these Coasts. The Canoa being gone, our Commander sent likewise what men we could spare on shore, to drive Goats, 
They kill Goats.  whereof there is great plenty in this Island. They caught and killed that day to the number of threescore, or thereabouts. The Canoa returning unto the ship, made report that there was good riding in another Bay, situate on the North side of the Island, in fourteen fathom water, and not above one quarter of a mile from the shore. Moreover that there was much wood to be had, whereas in the place where we had first anchored, not one stick of wood nor tuft of grass was to be found.  
The next day, being the 27th, between two and four of the clock in the morning, 
A great storm.  we had a tempest of violent winds and fierce showers of rain. The same day we got in two hundred jars of water, bringing them the full distance of a league from the place of our riding. 
They take in water.  In the mean while, others were employed to catch Goats, as they had done the day before.  
On the 28th of the said month, in the morning I went with ten more of our company, and two Canoas', to fetch water from the land. Being come thither, and having filled our jars, we could not get back unto the ship, by reason of a Southerly wind that blew from off the Ocean, 
The Author in great danger▪  and hindered our return. Thus we were forced to lie still in a water-hole, and wait till the wind were over for a safer opportunity. Mean while, the violence of the wind increasing, our ship was forced to get under sail, and make away, not without danger of being forced ashore. Hereupon she sailed out of the harbour, to seek another place of anchoring. At noon I ventured out, to try if I could follow the ship, but was forced in again by the wind and a raging sea. Thus we lay still for some while longer, till the evening came on. This being come, we ventured out again both Canoa's together: but the winds were then so high, that we were forced to throw all our jars of water overboard to lighten our boats, otherwise we had inevitably perished. I ought to bless and praise God Almighty for this deliverance; for in all humane reason, the least wave of that tempest must have sunk us. Notwithstanding, we came that night to our place or harbour, where we expected to have found our ship (called False wild harbour) but found her not. Hereupon not knowing what to do, we went ashore, and halled up our Canoa's dry. Having done this, we ascended higher within the Island, along a Gulley, for the space of half a mile, there to clear ourselves of the noise and company of the Seals which were very troublesome on the shore. Here we kindled a fire, 
Multitudes of Zeals.  and dried our clothes, and rested ourselves all night, though with extreme hungry bellies, as having eaten very little or nothing all the day before. In the sides of the hill, under which we lay, we observed many holes like Coney-holes. These holes are the nests and roosting-places of multitudes of birds that breed in this Island, called by the Spaniards, Pardelas. One of these birds, as we lay drying and warming ourselves, fell down into our fire. 
Pardelas.   
The next morning being come, very early before Sun-rise, we went farther to the Northward, to seek for our ship which we feared we had lost. But we were not gone far, when we soon espied her at sea. Hereupon we passed a point of land, and entered a certain Bay, which was about a mile deep, and not above half a league over. Into this Bay we put, and instantly made a fire, thereby to show the ship whereabouts we were. Here we found good watering and wooding close unto the shore. In this Bay also we saw another sort of amphibious Animal, the which I imagined to be the same, that by some Authors is called a Sea-Lyon. These Animals are six times bigger than Seals. 
〈…〉 of ● Sea-Lyon.  Their heads are like unto that of a Lion, and they have four fins not unlike unto a Tortoise. The hinder parts of these Creatures are much like fins, but are drawn after them, as being useless upon the shore. They roared as if they had been Lions, and were full of a certain short and thick hair, which was of a Mouse colour; but that of the young ones was something lighter. The old ones of these Sea-Lyons are between twelve and fourteen foot long, and about eleven or twelve foot in thickness, or circumference. A Seal is very easily killed, as we often experimented, but two of our men with great stones could not kill one of these Animals.  
That day in the afternoon there came a Canoa from on board the ship with Provision for us, 
The ship forced to sea twice or t●●ice.  they fearing lest we should be starved. In like manner the Launch came with men to cut wood. They told us that the ship came to an Anchor in the other Bay, but that within half an hour the Cable broke, and they were forced to leave their Anchor behind them and get out to Sea again. Night being come, we made our beds of Fern, whereof there is huge plenty upon this Island; together with great multitudes of Trees like unto our English Box, the which bore a sort of green Berries, smelling like unto Pimiento, or Pepper. All this day the ship was forced to ply off at Sea, not being able to get in.  
December the thirtieth. The morning of this day we employed in filling water, and cutting down wood. But in the afternoon, eight of us eleven, went aboard the ship, all in one and the same Canoa, sending her ashore again with Provisions for the men that were there. This day in like manner we could not get into the Harbour, for no sooner the ship came within the parts of Land, but the wind coming out of the Bay, blew us clear out again. Thus we were forced to ply out all that night, and great part of the following day.  
On the next day having overcome all difficulties, 
They get the ship in again.  and many dangers, we came to an Anchor in the afternoon, in fifteen fathom water, at the distance of a Cable length from shore. Here it was observable, that we were forced to keep men ashore on purpose to beat off the Seals, mean while our men filled water at the Sea side, at high-water mark, for as much as that the Seals covet hugely to lie in fresh water. About this Island fish is so plentiful, that in less than one hours' time, two men caught enough for all our whole company.  
Saturday January the first, 1680. 
Craw-fish.  This day we put up a new Maintop, larger than the old one; and we caught Craw-fish that were bigger than our English Lobsters.  
The next day being January the second, died a chief man of our company, whose name was John Hilliard. 
The death of the Master of the ship.  This man until our weighing Anchor from the Port of Coquimbo, had been our Master all the space of this Voyage. But from that time we chose John Cox for the Starboard, and John Fall for the Larboard watch. The disease whereof he died was the Dropsy. That evening we buried our dead Companion, and gave him a Volley for his Funeral, according to the usual custom.  
On the third of January we had terrible gusts of wind from the shore every hour. 
A man liveth five years alone.  This day our Pilot told us, that many years ago a certain ship was cast away upon this Island, and only one man saved, who lived alone upon the Island five years before any ship came this way to carry him off. The Island hath excellent Land in many Valleys belonging thereunto. This day likewise we fetched our Anchor which we left in the other Bay when the ship broke her Cable.  

Now dangers of the ship.  Tuesday January the fourth, 1680. This day we had such terrible flaws of wind, that the Cable of our ship broke, and we had undoubtedly been on shore, had not the other held us fast. At last it came home and we drove outward. By the way it caught hold of a Rock, and held some time, but at last we haled it up, and the wind came with so much violence, 
A great storm  that the waves slew as high as our Maintop, and made all the water of a foam.  
January the fifth, the same huge gusts of wind continued all the night last passed, 
They 〈◊〉 again  which notwithstanding this day at noon it was brave and calm. But in the morning the Anchor of our ship gave way again, and we drove to the Eastward more than half a mile, till at last we happened to fasten again in the depth of sixty fathom water. Here in this Bay where we rid at Anchor, did run a violent current, sometimes into, and at other times out of the Bay; so that all was uncertain with us. But our greatest discomfort was, that our men were all in a mutiny against each other, and much divided among themselves. 
The m●n begin to mutiny.  Some of them being for going home towards England, or our Foreign Plantations, & that round about America through the straits of Magallanes, as Captain Sawkins had designed to do; others of them being for staying longer, and searching farther into those Seas, till such time as they had got more Money. This day at noon our Anchor drove again; whereupon to secure ourselves from that dangerous place, 
They remove to another Bay.  we sailed from thence into the West Bay, and anchored there in twenty five fathom water, and moored our ship one quarter of a mile from shore.  
On Thursday January the sixth, our dissensions being now grown unto a great height, 
The Mutineers make a new Commander.  the Mutineers made a new Election of another person to be our chief Captain and Commander, by virtue whereof they deposed Captain Sharp, whom they protested they would obey no longer. They chose therefore one of our company, whose name was John Watling, to command in chief, he having been an old Privateer, and gained the esteem of being a stout Seaman. The election being made, all the rest were forced to give their assent unto it, and Captain Sharp gave over his command, whereupon they immediately made Articles with Watling, and signed them.  
The following day being the seventh, 
Cook put i● Irons.  we burned and tallowed the starboard side of our ship. In this Bay where we now anchored, we found a Cross cut in the Bark of a Tree, and several Letters besides. Hereupon, in another Tree up the Gulley, I engraved the two first Letters of my name, with a Cross over them. This day likewise William Cook, servant unto Captain Edmund Cook, confessed that his Master had oft times Buggered him in England, leaving his Wife and coming to bed to him the said William. That the same crime he had also perpetrated in Jamaica; and once in these Seas before Panama. Moreover, searching his Writings, we found a paper with all our names written in it, the which it was suspected he designed to have given unto the Spanish prisoners. For these reasons, this evening our Captain thought it convenient to put him in Irons, which was accordingly done. The next day unto the abovementioned in this Paragraph, we finished the other side of our ship.  
Sunday January the ninth, this day was the first Sunday that ever we kept by command and common consent, 
Sundays ordered to be kept.  since the loss and death of our valiant Commander Captain Sawkins. This generous spirited man threw the dice over board, finding them in use on the said day.  
January the Tenth, 
Great plenty of fish.  this day the weather was very clear and settled again. We caught every day in this Bay, where we now were, great plenty of fish; and I saw the same day a shoal of fish a mile and more long.  
On the next day being the eleventh, we filled our water, and carried our wood on board the ship. Moreover, 
water and wood taken in  our two Canoas' went to the other side of the Island to catch Goats, for on the barren side thereof are found and caught the best; and by Land it is impossible to go from one side of the Island to the other.  

They espy three men of war.  Wednesday January the twelfth, this morning our Canoas' returned from catching of Goats, firing of Guns as they came towards us to give us warning. Being come on board, they told us, they had espied three sail of ships, which they conceived to be men of War coming about the Island. Within half an hour after this notice given by our Boats, the ships came in sight to Leeward of the Island. Hereupon we immediately slipped our Cables, and put to Sea, taking all our men on board that were ashore at that time. Only one William a Mosquito Indian, was then left behind upon the Island, because he could not be found at this our sudden departure. Upon the Island of Juan Fernandez do grow certain Trees that are called by the name of Bilbytrees. 
〈◊〉- trees.  The tops of these trees are excellent Cabbage, and of them is made the same use that we do of Cabbage in England. Here fish aboundeth in such quantity▪ that on the surface of the water I have taken fish with a bare and naked hook, that is to say, unbaited. Much fish is taken here of the weight of twenty pound; the smallest that is taken in the Bay being almost two pound weight. Very good Timber for building of Houses and other uses, is likewise found upon this Island. It is distant from the Main Continent the space of ninety five Leagues, or thereabouts, being situate in 33 d. 40 South. The plaits of the Islands lie N.W. and S.E.  
Being got out of the Bay we stood off to Sea, and kept to windward as close as we could. The biggest of these Spanish men of War, 
Strength of the men of war.  for such they proved to be, was of the burden of eight hundred Tuns, and was called El Santo Christo, being mounted with twelve Guns. The second named San Francisco, was of the port of six hundred Tuns, and had ten guns. The third was of the carriage of three hundred and fifty Tuns, whose name I have forgot. As soon as they saw us, they instantly put out their bloody flags, and we, to show them that we were not as yet daunted, did the same with ours. We kept close under the wind, and were, to confess the truth, very unwilling to fight them, by reason they kept all in a knot together, and we could not single out any one of them, or separate him from the rest. Especially considering, that our present Commander Watling had showed himself at their appearance to be faint hearted. As for the Spaniards themselves, they might have easily come unto us, by reason we lay by several times: but undoubtedly they were cowardly given, and peradventure as unwilling to engage us, as we were to engage them.  
The following day being January the thirteenth, in the morning we could descry one of the forementioned men of war, under the Leeward side of the Island; and we believed that the rest were at Anchor thereabouts. At W. by S. and at the distance of seven Leagues the Island appeareth thus.  
Isle of Juan Fernandez. Lat. 33 d. 40 South.  
At noon that day we stood in towards the Island, 
They gave them the 〈◊〉.  making as if that we intended to be in with them. But in the afternoon our Commander propounded the question unto us, whether we were willing now that the Fleet was to windward, to bare away from them? Unto this we all agreed with one consent. And hereupon, night being come, with a fresh wind at S.S.E. we stood away N.E. by N. and thus gave them handsomely the slip, after having out braved them that day, and the day before.  
Isla de Juan Fernandez.   

CHAP. XVI. The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Juan Fernandez, unto that of Yqueque. Here they take several Prisoners, and learn intelligence of the posture of affairs at Arica. Cruelty committed upon one of the said prisoners, who had rightly informed them. They attempt Arica the second time, and take the Town, but are beaten out of it again before they could plunder, with great loss of men, many of them being killed, wounded, and made Prisoners. Captain Watling their chief Commander is killed in this Attacque, and Captain Sharp presently chosen again, who leadeth them off, and through Mountains of difficulties, maketh a bold Retreat unto the ship.  
HAving bid our enemies adieu, after the manner as was said in the precedent Chapter, 
They leave the Isle of J. Fernandez.  the next morning being January the 14th. we bore N. E. We reckoned this day a N.N.E. one quarter South way, and by it, thirty Leagues. We were four Leagues Eastward from the Isle of Juan Fernandez, when I took our departure.  
Saturday January the 15th, we had hasey weather. This day we made by a N. E. by N. way eleven Leagues. The same hasey weather continued in like manner the 16th. But about ten that morning the wind died away. Our reckoning was a N.E. by N. way, and thirty six Leagues.  
On the 17th we had a soft gale, and a clear observation. We found by it Lat. 28 d. 47 S. Easting seventy Leagues. The next day we had likewise a clear day, and we reckoned by a N· E. by N. way, thirty one leagues. By observation Lat. 27 d. 29 South.  
Wednesday January the 19th, we had a clear day, as before, 
They resolve for Arica.  and reckoned a N. E. by N. way, and thirty five Leagues and two thirds. By observation we took Lat. 25 d. 00. South. This day we put up our top-gallant masts and sails, the which we had taken down at the Island of Juan Fernandez, when we thought to have gone directly from thence for the straits of Magallanes. But now our resolutions were changed, and our course was bend for Arica, that rich place, the second time, to try what good we could do upon it by another attempt, in order to the making all our fortunes there. In the evening of this day we saw Land at a great distance.  

 January the 20th, about midnight passed we had a small Land-wind that sprang up and reached us. At break of day we could descry Land again, at the distance of nine or ten Leagues more or less. This day was very hot and calm, Easting ninety two Leagues.  
On the 21. we had very little wind, and all along as we went we could descry high land, and that barren. We sailed N. by E. and N.N.E. along the Coast of the Continent.  
The next day being Saturday the 22 of January, we had very hot weather. 
〈◊〉 look out for Yqueque.  This day we sailed N. and N. by E. and looked out continually for the Island of Yqueque, which our Pilot told us was hereabouts. We kept at a just distance from Land, for fear of being descried by the enemy.  
On the following day, Sunday the 23. we sailed in like manner N.N.E. along the Coast, which seemeth to be very full of Bays hereabouts. By observation this day, we took Lat. 21 d. 49. South.  
Monday January the 24th, this day we had an indifferent gale of wind, 
 and we stood N. and by E. the wind being S.S.E. We found Latitude by observation 21 d. 02 South. Our whole Easting I reckoned to be ninety two leagues and an half. In the afternoon of this day Captain Watling our Commander, and twenty five men more departed from the ship in two Canoas', with design to seek for, and take the Island of Yqueque, and there to gain intelligence of the posture of affairs at Arica. We were at the distance of twelve leagues from shore, when they went away from the ship.  
The next day by a clear observation, 
They find it not.  we found Lat. 20 d. 40 South. At four in the afternoon this day, returned one of our Canoas', bringing word that they could not find the Island, though they had searched for it very diligently. At night came the other, being brought back by a wrong sign given us by the first Canoa. This second Canoa had landed upon the Continent, and there found a tract, the which they followed for some little space. Here they met a dead Whale, with whose bones the Spaniards had built a Hut, and set up a Cross. There lay also many pieces of broken Jars. They observed likewise, that hereabouts upon the Coast were many Bays, good landing, and anchoring for ships. That evening about seven of the clock, a fresh gang departed from the ship to seek for the same Island, mean while we lay becalmed all night, driving about a league to leeward.  
Wednesday January the 26th, 
Rich Mines on the Continent.  we had extreme hot weather. This day the Spanish Pilot told us, that on the Continent over against us, and at the distance of a very little way within the Land, are many rich Mines of Silver, but that the Spaniards dared not to open them for fear of an Invasion from some Foreign enemy or other. We sailed North, at the distance of about two leagues from shore. At noon we had an observation, and found Lat. 20 d. 21 S. At four of the clock we saw a smoke made by our men, 
The Island i●▪ ●ound.  close by a white cleft, which proved to be the Island. Hereupon we immediately sent away another Canoa with more men, to supply them in their attempts. But in the mean while the first Canoa which had departed the evening before this day, came aboard, bringing with them four prisoners, two old white men, and two Indians.  

An account of the Island.  The other Canoa which set out last, brought back Molossus, Fish, and two Jars of wine. To windward of the said Island, is a small village of eighteen or twenty houses, having a small Chapel nigh unto it, built of stone, and for adornment thereof, it is stuck full of Hides, or the skins of Seals. They found about fifty people in this Hamlet, but the greatest part of them made their escape at the arrival of the Canoa. Unto this Island do frequently come Barks from Arica, which City is not far distant from thence to fetch clay, and they have already transported away a considerable part thereof. The poor Indians, Inhabitants or Natives of this Island, are forced to bring all the fresh water they use, the full distance of eleven leagues from thence, that is to say, from a River name Camarones', which lieth to Leeward of the Island. The Bark wherein they used to bring it, was then gone for water, when our men landed upon the place. The Island all over is white, but the bowels thereof are of a reddish sort of earth. From the shore is seen here a great path which leadeth over the Mountains into the Country. The Indians of this Island use to eat much and often, a sort of Leaves that are of a taste much like unto our Bay-leaves in England. Insomuch, that their teeth are died of a green colour, by the continual use thereof. The Inhabitants go stark naked, and are very robust and strong people; yet notwithstanding they live more like beasts than men.  

 Thursday January the 27th, this morning on board the ship, we examined one of the old men, who were taken prisoners upon the Island the day before. But finding him in many Lies, as we thought, concerning Arica, our Commander ordered him to be shot to death, which was accordingly done. Our old Commander Captain Sharp was much troubled in his mind and dissatisfyed at this cruelty and rash proceeding; whereupon he opposed it as much as he could. But seeing he could not prevail, he took water and washed his hands, 
Sharp 〈◊〉 at it.  saying, Gentlemen, I am clear of the blood of this old man; and I will warrant you a hot day for this piece of cruelty, whenever we come to fight at Arica. These words were found at the latter end of this expedition of Arica, to contain a true and certain prophecy, as shall be related hereafter.  
The other old man being under examination, informed us, that the Island of Yqueque aforementioned, 
Another prisoner examined.  belonged unto the Governor of Arica, who was Proprietor thereof; and that he allowed unto these men a little wine, and other Necessaries, to live upon for their sustenance. That he himself had the superintendance of forty or fifty of the Governors' slaves, who caught fish and dried it, for the profit of the said Governor; and he sold it afterwards to the inland Towns, and reaped a considerable benefit thereby. That by a Letter received from Arica, eight days ago, they understood there was then in the Harbour of Arica, three ships from Chile, and one Bark. That they had raised there a Fortification mounted with Twelve Copper Guns. But that when we were there before, they had conveyed out of the Town unto the neighbouring stantions, all their Plate, Gold, and Jewels, burying it there in the ground, and concealing it after several manners and ways. The which whether it were now returned or not, he could not easily tell. That there were two great places, the one at ten, the other at twenty five leagues distance from Arica, at which Towns lay all their strength and treasure. That the day before had passed a Post to declare our having been at Coquimbo. That the Embargo laid on all vessels going to the Northward, was now taken off; so that a free passage was allowed them. That by Land it was impossible to go from hence unto Arica in less than four or five days, for as much as they must carry water for themselves and Horses for the whole journey. At last, that those Arms that were brought from Lima unto Arica, as was mentioned above, were now carried away from thence unto Buenos Ayres. All these things pleased us mighty well to hear them. But however, Captain Sharp was still much dissatisfyed, by reason we had shot the old man. For he had given us information to the full, and with all manner of truth, how that Arica was greatly fortified, and much more than before; but our misfortune was, that we took his information to be all contrary to the truth.  
The leaves of which we made mention above, are brought down unto this Island in whole Bales, 
They take the Bark of the Island.  and then distributed unto the Indians by a short allowance given to each man. This day we had very hot weather, and a S. W. Sea. By observation we found Lat. 20 d. 13 South. Besides the things abovementioned, our prisoners informed us, that at Arica the Spaniards had built a breast-work round about the Town; and one also in every street, that in case one end of the Town were taken, they might be able to defend the other. We stood off and in for the greatest part of this day. In the afternoon we were eight leagues and an half distant from shore, with a fresh wind. That morning moreover we took the Bark that was at the River of Camarones', to fill water for the Island.  
Friday January the 28th, last night about midnight we left the ship, 
They embark in the Boats for Arica.  and embarked ourselves in the Bark aforementioned, the Launch, and four Canoas', with design to take Arica by surprisal. We rowed and sailed all night, making in for the shore.  
Saturday January the 29th, about break of day this day, we got under shore, 
They lie hidden by day.  and there hid ourselves among the Rocks for all the day long, fearing lest we should be descried by the enemy, before we came to Arica. At this time we were about five leagues to Southward of Arica, nigh Quebrada de San Vitor, a place so called upon that Coast. Night being come, we rowed away from thence.  
Sunday January the 30th, 1680. this day (being the day that is consecrated in our English Calendar, 
They land and atta●●e the 〈◊〉.  unto the Martyrdom of our glorious King Charles the First) in the morning about Sun-rise, we landed amongst some Rocks, at the distance of four miles, more or less, to the Southward from Arica. We put on shore ninety two men in all, the rest remaining in the Boats, to keep and defend them from being surprised by the enemy, to the intent we might leave behind us a safe retreat, in case of necessity. Unto these men we left strict orders, that if we made one smoke from the Town, or adjoining fields, they should come after us towards the harbour of Arica with one Canoa; but in case we made two, that they should bring all away, leaving only fifteen men in the Boats. As we marched from our landing place towards the Town, we mounted a very steep hill, and saw from thence no men, nor Forces of the enemy; which caused us to hope we were not as yet descried, and that we should utterly surprise them. But when we were come about half of the way unto the Town, we espied three horsemen, who mounted the Look-out hill; and seeing us upon our march, they rid down full speed towards the City, to give notice of our approach. Our Commander Watling chose out forty of our number, to attaque the Fort, and sent us away first thitherwards, the rest being designed for the Town. 
They assault the Fort.  We that were appointed for the Fort, had ten hand Granades among us, when we gave the assault, and with them, as well as with our other Arms, we attacked the Castle, and exchanged several shot with our enemies. But at last, seeing our main body in danger of being overborne with the number of our enemies, we gave over that attempt on the Fort, and ran down in all haste unto the valley, to help and assist them in the fight. Here the Battle was very desperate, and they killed three, and wounded two more of our men from their outworks, before we could gain upon them. But our rage increasing with our wounds, we still advanced, and at last beat the enemy out of all, and filled every street in the City with dead bodies. The enemy made several retreats unto several places, from one breast-work to another; 
The Town taken.  and we had not a sufficient number of men wherewith to man all places taken. Insomuch, that we had no sooner beat them out of one place, but they came another way, and man'd it again with new Forces and fresh men.  

 We took in every place where we vanquished the enemy, great number of Prisoners, more indeed, then peradventure we ought to have done, or we kn●w well what to do withal; they being too many for such a small body as ours was to manage. These prisoners informed us, that we had been descried no less than three days before, from the Island of Yqueque, whereby they were in expectation of our arrival every hour, as knowing we had still a design to make a second attempt upon that place. That into the City were come four hundred Soldiers from Lima, the which, besides their own, had brought seven hundred Arms for the use of the Countrypeople; and that in the Town they had six hundred armed men, and in the Fort three hundred.  

 Being now in possession of the City, or the greatest part thereof, we sent unto the Fort, commanding them to surrender. But they would not vouchsafe to send us any answer. Hereupon we advanced towards it, and gave it a second Attaque, wherein we persisted very vigorously for a long time. Being not able to carry it, we got upon the top of a house that stood nigh unto it, and from thence fired down into the Fort, killing many of their men, and wounding them at our ease and pleasure. But mean while we were busyed in this Attaque, the rest of the enemy's Forces had taken again several Posts of the Town, and began to surround us in great numbers, with design to cut us off. Hereupon we were constrained to desist the second time, 
The spaniards 〈…〉  as before, from assaulting the Fort, and make head against them. This we no sooner had done, but their numbers and vigour increasing every moment, we found ourselves to be over poured, and consequently we thought it conve●●ent to retreat unto the plaee where our wounded men 〈◊〉, under the hands of our Surgeons, that is to say, our 〈◊〉. At this time our new Commander Captain 〈◊〉, both our Quartermasters, and a great many o 〈…〉 our men were killed, besides those that were woun●●● and disabled to fight. So that now the enemy rallying against us, and beating us from place to place, we were in a very distracted condition, and in more likelihood to perish every man, than escape the bloodiness of that day. Now we found the words of Captain Sharp to bear a true prophecy, being all very sensible, that we had had a day too hot for us, after that cruel heat in killing and murdering in cold blood, the old Mestizo Indian whom we had taken prisoner at Yqueque, as before was mentioned.  
Being surrounded with difficulties on all sides, and in great disorder, 
Sharp is chosen anew.  as having no head nor leader to give orders for what was to be done, we were glad to turn our eyes unto our good and old Commander Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and beg of him very earnestly to commiserate our condition, and carry us off. It was a great while that we were reiterating our supplications unto him, before he would take any notice of our request in this point. So much was he displeased with the former mutiny of our people against him, all which had been occasioned by the instigation of Mr. Cook. But Sharp is a man of an undaunted courage, and of an excellent conduct, not fearing in the least to look an insulting enemy in the face, and a person that knoweth both the Theory and practical parts of Navigation, as well as most do. Hereupon, at our request and earnest petition, 
They retreat with great difficulty.  he took upon him the command in chief again, and began to distribute his orders for our safety. He would have brought off our Surgeons, but that they had been drinking in the mean while that we assaulted the Fort, and thus would not come with us when they were called. They killed and took of our number twenty eight men, besides eighteen more that we brought off, who were desperately wounded. At this time we were all extreme faint for want of water and victuals, whereof we had had none all that day. Moreover, we were almost choked with the dust of the Town; this being so much raised by the work that their great Guns had made, that we could scarcely see each other. They beat us out of the Town, and then followed us into the Savanas, or open fields, still charging us as fast as they could. But when they saw that we rallyed again, resolving to die one by another, they then ran from us into the Town, and sheltered themselves under their breast-works. Thus we retreated in as good order as we could possibly observe in that confusion. But their Horsemen followed us as we retired, and fired at us all the way, though they would not come within reach of our Guns; for their own reached farther than ours, and outshot us more than one third. We took the seaside for our greater security; the which when the enemy saw, they betook themselves unto the Hills, rolling down great stones, and whole Rocks to destroy us. In the mean while those of the Town examined our Surgeons, and other men whom they had made prisoners. These gave them our signs that we had left unto our Boats that were behind us, so that they immediately blew up two smokes, which were perceived by the Canoas'. This was the greatest of our dangers. For had we not come at that instant that we did, unto the seaside, our Boats had been gone, they being already under sail, and we had inevitably perished every man. Thus we put off from the shore, and got on board about ten of the clock at night, having been involved in a continual and bloody fight with the enemy all that day long.   

CHAP. XVII. A description of the Bay of Arica. They sail from hence unto the Port of Guasco, where they get Provisions. A draught of the said Port. They land again at Hilo to revenge the former affronts, and took what they could find.  
HAving ended our attempt at Arica, the next day, 
They depart from Arica  being January the last, we plied to and fro in sight of the Port, to see if they would send out the three ships we had seen in the Harbour to fight us. For upon them we hoped to revenge the defeat and disappointment we had received at the Town the day before. But our expectations in this point also were frustrated, for not one of those vessels offered to stir.  
The houses of this Town of Arica are not above eleven foot high, as being built of earth, 
An account of Arica.  and not of brick or timber. The Town itself is foursquare in figure, and at one corner thereof standeth the Castle, which may easily be commanded even with small Arms, from the hill which lieth close unto it. This place is the Embarcadero, or Port-Town of all the Mineral Towns that lie hereabouts, and hence is fetched all the Plate that is carried to Lima, the head-City of Peru. I took the Bay of Arica as it appeared to me thus.  
A description of Arica  
On Tuesday February the first, we had a clear observation, and by it we found Lat. 19 d. 06. South. 
They make a s●all dividend.  This day we shared the old remains of our Plate, taken in some of our former booties. Our shares amounted only unto thirty seven pieces of Eight to each man.  
N. B. Here I would have my Reader to take notice, that from this day forwards, I kept no constant Diary or Journal, as I had done before, at least for some considerable space of time, as you shall see hereafter; my disease and sickness at Sea being the occasion of intermitting what I had never failed to do in all the course of this Voyage till now. Only some few Memorandums, as my weakness gave leave, I now and then committed to paper, the which I shall give you as I find them, towards a continuance of this History. Thus:  
Monday February the 14th, this night between eleven add twelve of the clock died on board our ship William Cook, 
Captain Cooks man dyeth.  who was the servant aforementioned unto Captain Edmund Cook, of whom likewise mention hath been often made in this Journal. He desisted not in the least, even at his last hour, to accuse his Master of Baggering him, as before was related. Moreover, that his Master should say, It was no sin to steal from us, who thought it none to rob the Spaniards.  
February the 16th, 1680. this day we found ourselves to be in Lat. 27 d. 30 South. We had a constant breeze at S. E. and S. S. E. till we got about two hundred Leagues from land. Then at the Eclipse of the Moon, we had a a calm for two or three days: 
Several calms.  and then a breeze at North for the space of two days; after which we had a calm again for two or three days more.  
March the first we found Latitude by observation 34 d. 01 South. 
Dirty weather  At this time beginneth the dirty weather in these Seas. We lay under a pair of courses, the wind being at S. E. and E. S. E. with a very great Sea at S. S.E  
March the third, all hands were called up, and a Council held; wherein considering it was now dirty weather, 
They resolve to go home over land.  and late in the year, we bore up the Helm, and resolved to go unto the Main for water, and thence to Leeward, and so march over land towards home, or at least to the North Sea. But God directed us from following this resolution, as you shall hear hereafter. We being thus determined that day, we stood N.E. with a strong wind at S.E. and E.S.E.  
On March the fifth died our Coquimbo Indian. The seventh we had a west-wind, our course being E. by N. The eighth of the said Month we were put to an allowance, 
Are put to an allowance.  having only one Cake of bread a day. March the tenth we had a strong Southwind.  

They descry la●d.  On March the 12th we fell in with the main land, something to Leeward of Coquimbo. Within the Island of Paxaros are double lands, in whose Valleys are fires for the melting of Copper, 
Furnaces of Copper.  with which Metal these Hills abound. Off to sea-board it is a rocky land, and within it is sandy. About the distance of eight Leagues to Leeward is a rocky point with several Keys or Rocks about it. About one half mile to Leeward of this point turneth in the Port of Guasco. 
Point of Guasco.  Right against the anchoring are three Rocks, close under the shore.  
Being arrived here, we landed on shore threescore men of our company, 
They land.  with design to get Provisions, and any thing else that we could purchase. The people of the Country ran all away as soon as they saw us. There was building on shore in this Port, a fire-Barque of sixteen or eighteen Tuns burden, with a Cockboat belonging unto it. 
And get Provisions.  We took one Indian Prisoner, and with him went up the space of six or seven miles into the Country, unto an Indian Town of Threescore or Fourscore houses. From thence we came back unto the Church, which is distant four miles from the Seaside, and lodged there all night. Here are multitudes of good Sheep and Goats in the Country adjoining to this Port, and it is watered with an excellent freshwater River; but the getting of water is very difficult, the banks being very high, or otherwise inaccessible. However, we made a shift to get in five hundred Jars of water. Furthermore, we brought away one hundred and twenty Sheep, and fourscore Goats, with which stock we victualled our vessel for a while. As for Oxen, they had driven them away farther up into the Country. 
An account of Guasco.  The jurisdiction of Guasco itself is governed by a Teniente, or Deputy-Governour, and a Friar, and is in subjection unto the City of la Serena abovementioned, as being a dependence thereupon. Here groweth both Corn, Pease, Beans, and several other sorts of Grain; and for Fruits, this place is not inferior unto Coquimbo. Here we found likewise a Mill to grind Corn, and about two hundred bushels thereof ready ground; the which we conveyed on board our ship. Every house of any account hath branches of water running through their yards or courts. The Inhabitants had hidden their Wine, and other best things, as Plate, and Jewels, having descried us at sea before our landing: 
They were descried before landing.  so that our booty here, besides Provisions, was inconsiderable. However, we caught some few Fowls, and eat five or six Sheep, and likewise a great Hog, which tasted very like unto our English Pork. The hills are all barren, so that the Country that beareth Fruit, is only an excellent Valley, being four times as broad as that of Hilo abovementioned. These people of Guasco serve the Town of Coquimbo with many sorts of Provisions. We gave the Indian whom we had taken his liberty, and I took the Port of Guasco thus.  
A Description of Guasco  
Tuesday March the 15th, 1680. 
They depart from Guasco.  This morning we departed from the Port of Guasco aforementioned, with very little wind, having done nothing considerable there, excepting only the taking in the few Provisions above-related. We were bend therefore to seek greater matters, having experimented but ill success in most of our attempts hitherto. On March the 20th, Moro de Horse, being high doubled Land, and at E. by N. appeared thus unto us, in Lat. 24 d. South.  
Moro de Horse. Lat. 24 d. S.  
At North, and at the distance of ten Leagues, more or less, we saw the great and high hill of Morro Moreno, being so called from its colour. It is a dark hill, but much higher and bigger than the other aforementioned, and appeareth like unto an Island, thus.  
Morro Moreno. Lat. 23 d. 30 S.  
We had now very dark weather all along the Coast. On March the 21 we were West from the Bay of Mexillones. 
Bay of Mexillones.  The point of this Bay one League upwards, representeth exactly a Sugar-loaf.  

They seek for the River Loa.  March the 22. This day our Boat and Canoas' went from the ship, being well man'd, to find the River Loa. They went also about two Leagues to Leeward of it, 
But cannot f●●d it.  unto a fishing village, but could find no place fit for landing; whereupon they returned without acting any thing. The next day another Canoa of our company went out upon the same exploit, but found the same success. Yet notwithstanding, here Sir Francis Drake watered, and built a Church, as we were told by our Pilot. This Church is now standing on the Seaside by the River, whose mouth is now dry. There are several Huts to windward of it; and from the said Church or Chappel goeth a great path up the hills, which leadeth to Pica.  
On Thursday March the 24th, we found Latitude by observation, 20 d. 10 South. This day also we saw Land, at eighteen leagues distance more or less.  
Sunday March the 27th, we saw Mora de Sama, and La cumba at some distance. The same day we had an observation, and found by it Lat. 18 d. 17 South. That evening we departed from the ship with our Boats and Canoas', towards the Coast of Hilo, upon which we now were. We landed and took the village of Hilo undiscryed, 
They surprise Hilo.  they scarce suspecting we could have any design upon that place the second time. We caught the Friar who was Chaplain unto the Town, and most of the Inhabitants asleep, making them prisoners at war. Here we heard a flying report, as if five thousand English had lately taken Panama the second time, and kept it. But this rumour, as it should seem, proved to be a falsity. At this time the River came out, and was overflown, it being near the time of the freshes. Here the prisoners told us, 
〈…〉 of their Surgeons at Arica.  that in Arica ten of our men were still alive, whereof three were Surgeons, all the rest being dead of their wounds. The Spaniards sent word unto Hilo, that we had killed them seventy men, and wounded three times as many of their Forces. But here the Inhabitants said, that of forty five men sent to the relief of Arica from hence, there came home but only two alive. We filled what water we pleased here; but a small boat that we brought from Guasco broke lose from us, and was s●aved to pieces on the Rocks. Here we took eighteen Jars of wine, and good store of new Figs. On Tuesday following we went up to the Sugar-work, mentioned in our former expedition against Hilo, and found all Fruits just ripe, and sit for eating. There we laded seven Mules downwards with Molossus and Sugar. The Inhabitants told us moreover, that those men who came to fight us when we were here the first time, were most of them Boys, and had only fifty Fire-arms amongst them. They being commanded by an English Gentleman who is Married at Arequipa. Likewise that the owner of the Sugar-work aforementioned was now engaged in a Suit at Law against the Town of Hilo, pretending it was not the English who rob him, and spoiled his Ingenio, when we were there before, but the Townsmen themselves. This day in the evening we sailed from Hilo with dark weather, and little wind, which continued for several days afterwards.   

CHAP. XVIII. They depart from the Port of Hilo, unto the Gulf of Nicoya, where they take down their decks, and mend the sailing of their ship. Forty seven of their Companions leave them, and go home over land. A description of the Gulf of Nicoya. They take two Barks and some Prisoners there. Several other remarks belonging to this Voyage.  

They leave Hilo.  FRom the time that we set sail from the Port of Hilo, until Sunday April the tenth, 1681. nothing happened unto us that might be accounted remarkable; neither did I take any notes all this while, by reason of my indisposition aforementioned. This day we could hear distinctly the breaking of the Seas on the shore, but could see no land, the weather being extreme dark and hasey. Notwithstanding about noon it cleared up, and we found ourselves to be in the Bay called de Malabrigo. The land in this Bay runneth due East and West. By an observation made, we found this day 6 d. 35 South. We saw from hence the Leeward Island of Lobos, or Seals, being nothing else than a rocky and scraggy place. On the S.W. side thereof is a red hill, which is a place about the said Island, where the Indian Fishermen much frequent. It is situate in Lat. 6 d. 15 S. This day likewise in the evening we saw the Point called Aguja.  
On Saturday April the 16th, we came within a league distance of the West-end of the Island of Plate, 
〈…〉 Pla●e.  above described. 
〈…〉 among themselves.  The next day unto this, being Sunday April the 17th, 1681. our Mutineers broke out again into an open dissension, they having been much dissatisfyed all along the course of this Voyage, but more especially since our unfortunate fight at Arica, and never entirely reconciled unto us since they chose Captain Watling, and deposed Sharp at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, as was related above. Nothing now could appease them, nor serve their turn, but a separation from the rest of the company, and a departure from us. Hereupon this day they departed from the ship, to the number of forty seven men, all in company together, 
Forty seven return home.  with design to go over land by the same way they came into those Seas. The rest who remained behind, did fully resolve, and faithfully promise to each other, they would stick close together. They took five slaves in their company, to guide and do them other service in that Journey. This day we had 1 d. 30 minutes Southern Latitude. We sailed N. N. W. before the wind.  
The next day after their departure, being April the 18th, we began to go to work about taking down one of our upper decks, 
Te●y begin to take down the decks.  thereby to cause our ship still to mend her sailing. We now made a N. W. by N. way, and had Latitude by observation 25 North, the wind being at S. W.  
On April the 19th we made a N. W. by N. way. This day our observation was Lat. 2 d. 45 North. In the afternoon we had cloudy weather. The following day likewise we made the same way, and by it seventy miles, according to my reckoning.  
On the twenty first in the morning we had some small showers of rain, and but little wind. We saw some Turtle upon the surface of the water, and great quantity of fish. We caught twenty six small Dolphins. By a N. W. by N. way, we reckoned this day forty miles.  
April the 22. this day we caught seven large Dolphins, 
Dolphins caught.  and one Bonito. We saw likewise whole multitudes of Turtle swimming upon the water, and took five of them. We had an observation that gave us Lat. 5 d. 28 North. Hereabouts runneth a great and strong current. This day we lowered the quarter deck of our ship, and made it even unto the upper deck.  

They save water from the rain that fell.  The following day we had but small wind, and yet great showers of rain. Hereupon every man saved water for himself, and a great quantity was saved for the whole company. In the morning of this day we caught eight Bonitoes, and in the evening ten more.  
On April the 24th we had both cloudy and rainy weather. By an observation we had Lat. 7 d. 37 North. Meridian difference was ninety two Leagues. This morning we caught forty Bonitoes, and in the evening thirty more. In the afternoon we stood North, the wind being at S. W. by S.  

Isla deal Cano.  Monday April the 25th, all the night before this day, we had huge gusts of wind and rain. At break of day we were close in with Land, which upon examination proved to be the Island of Cano. To westward thereof is very high land. About noon this day it cleared up, and we had Lat. 8 d. 34 N. In the evening we sent a Canoa to search the Island. In it they found good water, and even ground, but withal, an open road. At night we stood off the first watch, and the last we had a land wind.  

They anchor ●ere.  The next day following, at day light we stood in, and about noon we came to an anchor at the East side of the Island aforementioned, which is not in breadth above one league over. In the afternoon we removed from our former anchoring place, and anchored again within shot of the N. E. point of the Island. In this place groweth great number of Cacao trees, 
Cacao-trees.  all over the greatest part of the Isle. On the North side thereof are many Rivulets of good water to be found in sandy bays. 
What else they 〈◊〉.  We saw moreover some good Hogs on shore, whereof we killed one and two pigs. Here are great numbers of Turtle-doves, and huge store of fish, but withal, very shy to be caught. To Northward of the Island it looketh thus.  
Isla deal Cano. Lat. 8 d. 45 N.  
April the 27th, we had some rain and wind the forepart of the day; but the afternoon was fair. 
They depart from the Isle of Cano.  The next day in like manner we had great quantity of rain. On Saturday the 30th, about seven of the clock in the morning we weighed from the aforesaid Island with little wind, and stood N. W. That day fell much rain with great thunder and lightning.  
Monday, May the 2d. This day we observed and found Lat. 9 D. N. The Coast all along appeared to us very high and mountainous, and scarce six hours did pass, 
Much thunder and rain.  but we had thunder, lightning, and rain. The like continued for the two days following, wherein we had nothing but almost continual thunder and rain.  
On May the 5th we had an indifferent fair day. And that evening we were right off of the Gulf of Nicoya. 
Gulf of Nicoya   
Friday, May the 6th. This morning we saw the Cape very plain before us. N. by E. from it, are certain keys at eight leagues distance, close under the Main. We steered N. N. W. towards the biggest of them; at whose E. S. E. side are two or three small rocks. The Main Eastward is fine Savana, or plain and even land, through which goeth a very great road, which is to be seen from off at Sea. At noon the Port of Caldero, 
Puerto Caldero.  commonly called Puerto Caldero bore N. from us. At which time the Ebb forced us to sound in the middle of the Gulf, where we found fourteen fathom water. After this we anchored nearer unto the Eastern keys, in the depth of nineteen fathom, where we had oosey ground.  
Saturday, May the 7th. The night before this day was very fair all night long. In the morning we went in a Canoa, being several in company, to seek for a place to lay our ship in. Amongst the Islands along the shore, we found many brave holes, but little or no water in them, which caused us to dislike what we had found. On one of the said Islands we happened to find a hat, and many empty jars of water, which shown us that some people had been lately there. About eight in the evening our ship weighed anchor at young flood, and about three after noon we anchored again in six fathom water.  
Sunday, May the 8th, 1681. The night before this day, we had much rain with thunder and lightning. The morning being come, our Commander Captain Sharp departed from the ship in two Canoas', with twenty two men in his company, out of design to surprise any vessels or people they could meet hereabouts. In the mean while, i'th' evening we drove up with the tide (there being no wind) in the ship, 
They take some prisoners, and two barks.  for the space of two or three leagues higher, till that we found but three fathom high water. Here we backed a stern. At this time we saw one of our Canoas' coming off from the Island, that was at head of us (which was named Chira) calling for more men and arms, and saying there was two sail of ships that were seen higher up the Gulf. Hereupon eight of us went away with them ashore, whereof two joined the party aforementioned, and the six remaining were appointed to guard the prisoners they had taken. Unto these we shown ourselves very kind, as finding that they were very sensible of the cruelties o● the Spaniards towards them and their whole Nation. Here we found to the number of eight or nine houses, and a small Chapel standing. These people have been in former times a considerable and great Nation, but are now almost destroyed and extinguished by the Spaniards. We ascended a creek of the Sea for the space of a league, or thereabouts, and took there by surprisal two Barks, which were the two sail they had told us of before. On of these Barks was the same we had taken before at Panama, of which I made mention at the beginning of this History.  
On Monday following this day, we weighed anchor with our barks, and drove down the creek, with the tide at ebb, towards our ship. 
They learn intelligence, and get some Spanish Carpenters  The prisoners that we had taken here, informed us, that when we were to Westward in these Seas before, there lay one hundred men at the Port of Santa Maria. That our men who left us at the Island of Cayboa, as was mentioned above, met the other Bark that we lost at Sea, as we were sailing thither, and thus all went over land together. That in the North Seas, near Puerto Velo, they had taken a good ship, and that for this cause, ever since the Spaniards had kept at the mouth of the river of Santa Maria, three Armadilla-barks, to stop and hinder others from going that way. On Monday night our Captain with twenty four men, went from the ship into another creek, and there took several prisoners, among whom was a Shipwright and his men, who were judged able to do us good service in the altering of our ship; those Carpenters being there actually building too great ships for the Spaniards. Having taken these men, they made a float of timber to bring down the Tools and Instruments they were working withal. Here it happened that they put several tools, and some quantity of ironwork, into a Doree, to be conveyed down the river with the float. But this Doree sank by the way, as being over-laden with iron, and one of our company, 
A Scotchman drown●d.  by name John Alexander a Scotchman, was unfortunately drowned by this means.  
On Thursday following, May the 12th, we sent a Canoa from the ship, and found the Doree that was drowned. That evening likewise drove down the body of our drowned man aforementioned. Hereupon we took him up, 
He is found and buried.  and on Friday morning following threw him overboard, giving him three French volleys for his customary Ceremony. Both this day and the day before, we fetched water from a Point near the houses, on the Island of Chira aforementioned. From the ship also we sent away a Spanish Merchant, 
A Merchant sent to seek a ransom.  whom we had taken among the prisoners, to fetch a certain number of Beefs, that might serve for a ransom of the new bark taken here. This day the weather was fair; but on Sunday following it reigned from morning until night.  
On Monday, May the 16th, we began to work all hands together on our ship. On Tuesday an Indian boy named Peter ran away from us. 
A boy runneth away.  He belonged unto Captain Sawkins, and waited upon him as his Servant. On Wednesday died an Indian slave, 
A slave dyeth.  whose name was Salvador. On Thursday we heard thirty or forty guns fired on the Main, which caused us to think that these would also turn to Hilo Beefs. On Friday we caught cockles, which were as large as both our fists. At night there fell such dreadful rain, with thunder, 
Much thunder and rain.  lightning, and wind, that for the space of two hours the air was as light as day; the thunder not ceasing all the while. On Sunday we continued to work; the night before which day we had more thunder, lightning, and rain.  
Wednesday, May the 25th. This day we finished our great piece of work, 
They finish their work.  viz. the taking down the deck of our ship. Besides which, the length of every mast was shortened, and all was now served and rigged. Insomuch that it would seem incredible unto strangers, could they but see how much work we performed in the space of a fortnight or less. 
They set at 〈…〉.  The same day likewise we set at liberty our Spanish Carpenters, who had been very serviceable to us all this while; the old Pilot; the old Spaniard taken at the Isle of Yqueque; and several others of our Spanish prisoners and slaves. Unto these people, but chief unto the Spanish Carpenters as a reward of their good service, we gave the new Bark, which we had taken at this place. But the old Bark we thought fit to keep, 
They 〈◊〉 men into the other Bark.  and sail her in our company, as we did, putting into her for this purpose six of our own men and two slaves. The next day we fell down as low as Vanero, a place so called hereabouts, and would have sailed away again that very evening, 
Vanero.  but that our tackle gave way in hoisting our anchor, whereby we lay still. In the Gulf of Nicoya we experimented most commonly a fresh breeze, and at night a land wind.  
Friday, May the 27th. This day likewise we drove down with the tide as low as Cavallo, another place so named in the Gulf. Here we stayed and watered that day; and here one Cannis Marcy our Interpreter, 
Their Interpret runneth away.  ran away from us.  
On May the 28th in the morning we sailed from thence, and came within twenty nine leagues of that rich and rocky shore. Yet notwithstanding we had but seven fathom water. Here I saw this day a white Porpus. 
A white Porpus.  Behind this Island is a Town called New Cape Blanco. At Puerto Caldero abovementioned is but one Storehouse to be seen. We came to an anchor in the depth of seven fathom water, at the distance of a league from shore, and caught five Turtle.  
May the 29th. This day we saw Cape Blanco. Both this day and the day following we continued turning it out of the Gulf, against a South wind. Here I took the ensuing demonstration of the Gulf of Nicoya, which, for the use of the Reader, I have hereunto annexed.  
Gulf of Nicoya described   

CHAP. XIX. They departed from the Gulf of Nicoya, unto Golfo Dulce, where they careen their Vessel. An account of their sailings along the Coast. Also a description of Golfo Dulce. The Spaniards force the Indians of Darien unto a Peace, by a stratagem contrived in the name of the English.  
WEdnesday, June the first, 1681. 
They leave the Gulf.  This day we had very fair weather, and yet withal but little wind. Hereupon the Tide, or Current, drove us to the Westward of Cabo Blanco. Off of this Cape, and at the distance of two miles within the Sea, is situate a naked and nothing but barren Key. At E. by N. and at four leagues distance, Cape Blanco gave us this appearance.  
Cabo BLANCO. Lat. 9 D. 30 N.  
The Coast here along runneth N. W half W. and groweth lower and lower towards Cape Guyones. This Cape now mentioned, at seven leagues distance, and at N. W. by N. appeared thus unto us.  
Cabo de Guyones. Lat. 10 D. 00 N.  
At first sight the Cape appeared very like unto two Islands. The latter part of this day was cloudy, which hindered much our prospect.  
June the 2d. This morning we saw land, which appeapeared like several Keys to us at N. W. by N. and at seven leagues distance. It was the land of Puerto de Velas, and appeared thus.  
Puerto de VELAS.  

They resolve to careen, and then cruize.  This evening our Captain called us together, and asked our opinions concerning the course we ought to steer. Having discussed the points by him proposed amongst us, we all resolved to bear up for Golfo Dulce, and there to careen our Vessels. This being done, we concluded to go from thence unto the Cape, and cruize thereabouts under the Equinoctial. We observed this day that our Bark taken at the Gulf of Nicoya, sailed much better than our ship.  
Friday, June the 3d. The night before this day was very fair, and we had a fresh wind, our course being S. E. This morning we saw no land. In the evening the wind came about at S. S. W. and S. W. by S.  
June the 4th. This day we stood E. and E. by N. the wind being W. and W. by N. In the evening we stood N. E. and descried land at the distance of twenty four leagues, more or less, from Cabo Blanco.  
Sunday, June the 5th. Last night we lay by for all, or the greatest part thereof. This morning we saw the Island of Canon above described, which bore E. S. E. from us. We saw likewise multitudes of fish, but they would not by't. Also Water-snakes of divers colours.  
June the 6th. All the night passed we had rain, and with it but little wind. Yea, scarce enough to carry us clear off from the Island aforementioned. Towards morning we had a fresh wind at N. N. W. So then we stood out S. until morning, and this being come, we stood N. E. by E. The land runneth from Punta Mala to Golfo Dulce, and Punta Borrica, E. S. E. half S. At nine leagues distance we laid the Island of Cano. And Punta Borrica at the same distance, or thereabouts, looketh thus.  
Punta Borrica. Lat. 8 D. 00 N.  
The West-end of Golfo Dulce is very high land, and a high rock lie close off it. Besides which, two other rocks lieth farther out; the outermost of which is a mile distant from the shore. The East-side is also high, but breaketh into small points and bays, growing lower and lower to Punta Borrica. We came within the mouth of the Gulf about the space of a mile. 
They anchor.  Then we anchored in eight fathom and a half water. The mouth of the Gulf is almost three leagues over.  
The next day, being June the 7th, we weighed anchor again at young flood, and got about two leagues higher. At evening we came again to an anchor in the depth of seven fathom and a half water. It reigned this day until eight of the clock, 
Much rain.  more like the pouring down of water from the clouds, than the usual falling of drops.  
Wednesday, June the 8th, at day break we weighed anchor again, with a fresh Sea-breeze. The higher up we went, the deeper we found the Gulf, and at last no ground even with thirty fathom of line. This day we sent our Canoa away to seek water and a good place to lay our ship in. Having landed, they found one Indian and two boys, all which they made prisoners and brought aboard. 
They take three prisoners.  Here we used them very kindly, giving them victuals and clothes, for they had no other than the bark of a tree to cover their nakedness withal. Being examined, they informed us that a Spanish Priest had been amongst them, and had made Peace with their Nation, ordering them strictly not to come near any ship nor vessel that had red Colours; forasmuch as that they were Englishmen, and would certainly kill them. Being asked where now the Priest was? they answered he was gone to a great Spanish Town, which was distant from thence four sleeps up in the Country. After this, the Indian left the two boys which were his children, with us, and went to fetch more Indians unto us, from a Plantane-walk or grove, situate by a river a league off, or thereabouts. We came to an anchor in a Bay close by one of the Indian Keys, where two fresh Rivers were within a stones throw of each other, in twenty seven fathom and a half water, and at a cables length from the mark of low water. The Indians whom our prisoner went to seek, came to us several times, selling unto us Honey, Plantanes, and other necessaries that we usually bought of them, or trucked for with other things. We also made use of their barklogs in tallowing our ship, in which concern they did us good service. Their Darts are headed with iron as sharp as any razor.  
Here one of the prisoners which we took at the Gulf of Nicoya, informed us, by what means, 
A peace forced upon the Indians of Darien.  or rather stratagem of War the Spaniards had forced a peace upon the Indians of the Province of Darien, since our departure from thence. The manner was as followeth. A certain Frenchman who ran from us at the Island of Taboga unto the Spaniards, was sent by them in a ship to the River's mouth, which disembogueth from that Province into the South-Sea. Being arrived there, he went ashore by himself in a Canoa, and told the Indians, that the English who had passed that way, were come back from their adventures in the South-Sea. Withal, he asked them, if they would not be so kind and friendly unto the English men, as to come aboard and conduct them on shore? The poor deceived Indians were very joyful to understand this good news; and thus forty of the chiefest men amongst them went on board the Spanish vessel, and were immediately carried prisoners at War to Panama. Here they were forced to conclude a peace, though upon terms very disadvantageous unto them, before they could obtain their liberty.  
These poor and miserable Indians of Golfo dulce, would come every day into our company, 
They 〈◊〉 their vessel.  and eat and drink very familiarly with us all the time we were there. We laid our ship on ground, but the water did not ebb low enough to see her keel. Mean while we were careening our vessel, we built a house upon the shore, both to lodge and eat in; and every day we caught plenty of good fish. On Sunday June the 12th, the work of Careening our ship going on in due order, we came to cleanse our hold, 
A strange accident.  and here on a sudden, both myself and several others were strucken totally blind with the filth and nastiness of the said place. Yet soon after we recovered our sight again, without any other help than the benefit of the fresh and open air, which dissipated those malignant vapours that oppressed our eyes. On June the 14th, we had a great and fierce Tornado, with which our Cable broke, 
A great danger.  and had it not then happened to be high water at that instant, we had been lost inevitably. However, we had the good fortune to shore her up again, and by that means secure ourselves from farther danger. On June the 21. we weighed anchor again, and went a league higher than the former place. Here we watered, and in the mean while left men below to cut wood.  

Two Negroes make their escape.  Thursday June the 23. this day ran away from us two Negroes; the name of one of them was Hernando, who was taken with Don Thomas de Argandona, upon the Coast of Guayaquil, as was mentioned above. The other was named Silvestre, being taken at the Town of Hilo. Following the example of these aforementioned, on Monday June the 27th, that is four days after, two more of our prisoners endeavoured to make their escape, both of them slaves. One of these was named Francisco, who was a Negro, and had been taken in the Cacao-ship mentioned before. The name of the other was also Francisco, and he was an Indian born, 
Others endeavour it but are taken.  who was taken before Panama. Their attempts to escape succeeded not, for we caught them both again, before they got on shore. On Tuesday following I went to sail up and down the Gulf, in the little Bark belonging to our ship; and having viewed all places, took this description of Golfo Dulce here inserted. Our Captain gave this Gulf the name of King CHARLES his Harbour.  
Adescription of Golfo Dulce   

CHAP. XX. They depart from Golfo Dulce, to go and cruise under the Aequinoctial. Here they take a rich Spanish vessel with 37000 Pieces of Eight, besides Plate and other Goods. They take also a Pacquet-boat bound from Panama to Lima. An account of their Sailing and the Coasts along.  
OUr vessel being now careened, and all things in a readiness for our departure, 
They resolve to go and cruise.  on Tuesday June the 28th in the afternoon, we weighed anchor to go to Sea again, turning out towards the mouth of Golfo Dulce. Our design was to cruise under the Aequinoctial, as had been concluded upon before, thereby to get what purchase we could by Sea, seeing the greatest part of our attempts upon land had proved hitherto very unsuccessful unto us.  
Wednesday June the 29th, both the night last passed and this day we had rainy weather. About three in the afternoon a fresh gale sprang up at S. W. and S.S.W. our course being S. E. and S. E. by S. At five this evening the Gulf bore N. W. by W. being seven leagues distant; and Punta Borrica three leagues and an half distant.  

The bark out-saileth the ship.  Thursday June the 30th, all night passed we enjoyed a fresh gale at S.S.W. We sailed in the Bark (where I was) better than the man of war; for so we called the Trinity vessel; notwithstanding that she was newly cleansed and tallowed. This day we had hasey weather, and I reckoned myself from Punta Borrica S.S.E. eighteen leagues and an half.  

Tornadoes.  July the first 1681, last night we had two or three Tornadoes. I reckoned this day a S.S.E. way, and by a clear observation, found Lat. 6 d. 10. North. We saw great quantities of fish as we sailed this day.  
July the second, we made a S. East way, and our reckoning was 64 by it. By observation I found Lat. 5 d. 20. North. At noon the same day we had a fresh gale at S.W. with some rain.  
July the third, we had hasey weather. We made a S.E. by S. way, and 37.  
Monday July the fourth, the night past was windy with rain, which forced us to hand our topsails. Our reckoning this day was a S. E. way, and an hundred miles.  
July the fifth we had a clear night the last past, and withal, a fresh gale. By this we made a S.E. way. Our Latitude this day gave us 2 d. 20. North. This morning we saw Land Southward of us lying in low hammocks. It was the Point, so called, of Manglares.  
Wednesday July the 6th, we turned up along shore, and by observation took this day, Lat. 2 d. 02 N. Hereabouts every new Moon is experimented a windward current. In the evening of this day we were close in with low land. We had windy weather and a great Sea.  
Thursday July the seventh, this day by observation taken, we found Lat. 01 d. 48. North. In the evening of the said day we lost sight of the said ship.  
The next day being July the eighth, we saw the ship again, whose loss began to create some concern in our minds. This day we made very high land all along as we went. And the Port, or rather Bay, of San Mateo, or St. Matthews, appeared unto us like several Islands.  
Saturday July the ninth, this morning we stood fair in with the Port of Tucames▪ Offa of the highest part of the land seemeth to lie a Key. At the North East point of the Port it appeareth exactly thus.  
Puerto de Tucames.  
This day at noon we had a clear observation, which gave us Lat. 01 d 22 North.  
Sunday July the tenth, last night passed we stood off to Sea, thereby to keep clear of the shore. This days observation shown us Lat. 01 d. 31. North. About noon the same day we happened to espy a Sail, 
They espy a Sail.  unto which immediately we gave chase. We bore up one point of the Compass, thereby to hinder her lasking away; but notwithstanding in the evening lost sight of her again. However, our great ship got up with her, and about eight of the clock at night made her a Prize. She proved to be the same ship named San Pedro, which we had taken the last year, being then bound from Truxillo to Panama, and laden with Wine, Gunpowder, and pieces of Eight, whereof mention was made in its due place. Thus this same bottom became doubly fortunate unto us, being twice taken by us in the space of fourteen Months. For she had on board her now twenty one thousand pieces of Eight, in eight Chests, and in bags sixteen thousand more, besides Plate.  
Monday and Tuesday the 11th and 12th of the said Month we made in for the shore. Our Prize was so deeply laden, that she seemed clearly to be buried in the water. She had forty men on board her besides some Merchants ●nd Friars. On Tuesday an observation gave us Lat. 1 ●. 20 N.  
Wednesday July the 13th, this day we dared not adventure into the Bay of San Mateo, because we saw some Indians who had made a great fire on shore, which as we judged, was designedly done to give intelligence of our arrival. Hereupon we bore away for the River of San Tiago, six leagues more or less, distant from the Bay aforementioned, to the North East. Thursday, Friday, 
They rommage the Prize.  and Saturday of the said week, we spent in taking out what parcels of Cacao-nut we thought sit from on board the Prize, which was chief laden with the said Commodity. This being done, we cut down the Mainmast by the board, 
And turn 〈◊〉 away.  and gave them only their Mainsail, and thus turning the ship lose, sent away in her all our old slaves, for the good service they had done us, taking new ones from the Prize in their room. One only we still detained, who was Francisco the Negro, that attempted to run away by swimming ashore, as was mentioned above.  
Sunday July the 17th, this day we went from the ship, and found the River of San Tiago aforementioned. 
River of San Tiago,  At the mouth of this River we stayed Monday and Tuesday following to take in water, which we now much wanted. On the sides of the River we found good store of Plantans. Our fresh water we fetched the distance of four miles up the River. We saw several Indians, but could not speak with them, they were so shy of us, being forewarned by the Spaniards not to come near us.  
On wednesday July the 20th, we shared our plunder among ourselves, 
They make a dividend.  or rather this day made part of the dividend of what we had taken, the rest being reserved to another day. Our prisoners being examined, informed us, that the Spaniards had taken up our Anchors and Cables which we left behind us at the Isle of Juan Fernandez. Also that they had surprised the Mosquito Indian that we left behind us there on shore, by the light of a fire which he made in the night upon the Isle.  
Tuesday July the twenty first, all the four and twenty hours last passed, we stood off and in. 
They share the rest of the goods.  The next day we shared the rest of our things taken in the Prize; as also the Money that was in the bags; the rest we laid up to divide upon another occasion. Especially after such time as we were got through the straits of Magallanes. Our dividend amounted to the sum of 234 Pieces of Eight unto each man. Our prisoners informed us this day, that a new Viceroy of Peru was arrived at Panama, and that he dared not adventure up to Lima in a ship of twenty five guns that was at Panama, for fear of meeting with us at Sea, but had chose rather to stay until the Armada came down from Lima to safeguard and conduct him thither.  
July the 23 we had a fresh breeze at S.W. And the next day a clear observation, which gave us only Latitude 14. m. North. This day Cape San Francisco at N.E. appeared thus unto us.  
Cabo de San Francisco.  
Monday July the 25th, this day we observed Latitude 01 d. 20 S. And we had a South West wind. July the 26th, this morning we had a very great dew fallen in the night last passed. The weather in like manner was very close. On Wednesday July the 27th Cape Passao, at S.S.W. and at six leagues distance appeared thus.  
Cabo Passao.  
The same morning about seven of the clock we espied a sail E.S.E. from us, under the shore. 
They espy another sail at sea  We presently gave her close chase, as eagerly as we could, and about noon came up with her. But several of the people belonging to her were already got to shore, whereby they made their escape from being taken our prisoners. These were chief a Friar, who was either a passenger, or Chaplain to the vessel, and five Negroes. She proved to be a Barco de Aviso, 
Which is taken.  or Pacquet-boat that was going with Letters from Panama to Lima. In this Bark we took among other Prisoners, two white women who were passengers to the same place. Both these and the rest of the prisoners told us, they had heard at Panama, that we were all gone out of these Seas homewards over land, and that made them adventure now up towards Lima, otherwise they had not come. This day and Thursday following, we spent in taking out of the Pacquet-boat what we could find in her; which all were things of no considerable value, they having scarce brought any thing with them but the Packet. They told us moreover, that the new Viceroy of Peru, of whom we made mention above, was setting forth from Panama under the conduct of three sail of ships; the one of sixteen, the other of eight, and the third of six Guns. That a general peace was all over Europe, excepting only that the English had wars with the Argerines' by Sea, and the Spaniards by land. Having got what we could out of the prisoners and the vessel, we gave them their liberty, and sent them away in the same Bark, as being desirous not to encumber ourselves with more than we could well manage. That night we stood out to Sea all night long, most of our men being fuddled.   

CHHP. XXI. They take another Spanish ship richly laden under the Aequinoctial. They make several Dividends of their booty among themselves. They arrive at the Isle of Plate, where they are in danger of being all Massacred by their Slaves and Prisoners. Their departure from thence for the Port and Bay of Paita, with design to plunder the said place.  
THe next morning after we had turned away the Pacquet-Boat aforementioned, 
〈…〉 with 〈◊〉 Prize.  the weather being very close, we espied another sail creeping close under our Lee. This vessel looked mighty big; so that we thought she had been one of their chiefest men of war, who was sent to surprise or destroy us. Notwithstanding, our brave Commander Captain Sharp resolved to fight her, and either to take the said vessel, though never so big, or that she should take us. Unto this effect, coming nearer unto her, we easily perceived she was a Merchant ship of great bulk, as most of your Spanish Vessels are, and withal, very deeply laden. Being up with them, those within her fired three or four Guns at us first, thinking to make their party good against us. But we answered them briskly, with a continual volley of small Arms, so that they soon ran down into the Hold, 
And take her.  and surrendered, crying aloud for quarter. As it should seem we had killed in that Volley their Captain, and one Seaman, and also wounded their Boatswain; which loss of their Commander daunted them so suddenly, he being a man of good repute in those Seas. Captain Sharp, with twelve more of our Company, entered her the first. In this Vessel I saw the beautifullest woman that I ever did see in all the South Sea. The name of the Captain of this Vessel was Don Diego Lopez, and the ship was called el Santo Rosario, or the Holy Rosary. The men we found on board her, were about the number of forty, more or less.  
Having examined our prisoners, they informed us, that the day before they set sail from el Callao (from which Port they were going towards Panama) our men whom they had taken prisoners at Arica, were brought in to that place. 
They hear of their Surgeons.  And that they had been very civilly entertained there by all sorts of people, but more especially by the women. That one of our Surgeons, whom we suspected to be Mr. Bullock, was left behind and remained still at Arica.  
We lay at anchor from Friday, July the 29th, which was the day we took this prize, until Wednesday following, 
They rummage the prize.  at the same place under Cape Passao that we anchored before. Here we sunk the Bark that we had taken at the Gulf of Nicoya, being willing to make use of what rigging she had, 
They sink their Bark.  and also to contract our number of men. In the mean while we took out of the prize much plate, and some money ready coined, besides six hundred and twenty jars of wine and brandy, and other things. Thus, leaving only the foremast standing in the said vessel, we turned her away, as we had done the others before, together with all the prisoners in her, giving them their liberty not to be encumbered with them; and withal, being desirous to spare our provisions as much as we could. We detained only one man, named Francisco, who was a Biscainer, by reason he reported himself to be the best Pilot of those Seas. This being done, we shared all the Plate and Linen taken in our prize, and weighed from thence, standing S.S. E. with a fresh wind that sprang up.  
Friday, August the 4th. This day we shared the ready money taken in the Rosario, 
Another dividend made.  our last prize. Our dividend came unto ninety four pieces of eight each man. Cape Passao, under which all these prizes were taken, at N. E. appeareth thus.  
Cabo Passao.  
The land runneth S. E. and is for five leagues together to windward of this Cape, all mountainous and high land.  
The next day, being August the 5th, we completed our dividends, 
They complete their dividends.  sharing this day all our odd money ready coined and plate, with some other things.  
Saturday, August the 6th. This day perusing some letters taken in the last prize, 
Letters perused  I understood by them that the Spaniards had taken prisoner one of the last party of our men that left us. Also, that they were forced to fight all their way over land as they went, both against the Spaniards and the Indians; these having made peace with the Spaniards since our departure, as was mentioned above. That our Englishmen had killed, amongst other Spaniards, the brother of Captain Assientoes, and Captain Alonso, a Officer so named. Moreover, that ten sail of Privateers were coming out of the North Sea, with intent to march over-land into the South Sea, as we had done before, but that they were prevented, being forced back by the great rains that fell near the Islands called Zamblas'.  
On August the 7th we had very fair weather, and notwithstanding sometimes strong winds from shore, 
A strong Current.  and also a strong Current to leeward. This ran so fierce against us the next day, August the 8th, that in the space of the last four and twenty hours we lost three leagues.  
Tuesday August the ninth, 
Manta.  we saw the Port and Town of Manta; this being nothing else than sixteen or seventeen straggling houses, with a large and high brick Church belonging unto it. What we got in the day by the help of the wind, we lost in the night by the current. The same fortune we had the next day, for we still gained no way all this while.  
Thursday August the eleventh, all the night last passed we had but little wind; this day we had a violent current to windward, as before, with some gusts of wind. However, by the help of these we made shift to get to windward of the Isle of Plate.  
August the 12th, in the morning, we came to an anchor at the aforesaid Isle. We sent our boat ashore with men, 
Isle of Plate.  as we had done formerly to kill Goats, but we experimented them to be extremely shy and fugitive over what they were the last year. Here it was that our Quartermaster James Chappel and myself fought a Duel together on shore. 
The Author fighteth a Duel  In the evening of this day our slaves agreed among themselves, and plotted to cut us all in pieces, not giving quarter to any, when we should be buried in sleep. They conceived this night afforded them the fittest opportunity, by reason we were all in drink. 
A plot of their slaves.  But they were discovered unto our Commander by one of their own Companions. And one of them named San Tiago, whom we brought from Yqueque, leapt overboard; who notwithstanding was shot in the water by our Captain, and thus punished for his Treason. The rest laid the fault on that slave, and so it passed, we being not willing to inquire any farther into the matter, having terrified them with the death of their companion. We lay at this Isle until Tuesday following, and in the mean while gave our vessel a pair of boots and tops, being very merry all the while with the wine and brandy we had taken in the Prize.  
On Tuesday August the 16th, in the afternoon, we weighed from thence with a S. W. wind. The Island at N. W. from us, gave us this following appearance.  
Isla de la Plata.  
Wednesday August the 17th, the Island at East, this morning and at two leagues and an half distance, appeared thus.  
Island of PLATE.  
All the day long until the evening we had a Leeward current, but then I could not perceive any.  

Solango.  Thursday August the 18th, this morning we were to windward of the Island of Solango. In the night before we had continual misty rain. At noon the aforesaid Island bore N. by E. of us, and at three Leagues distance appeared thus.  
Isla de Solango.  
About three Leagues from Solango are two Rocks, called Los ahorcadoes. They appear both high and black unto the view. Besides this N. N. E. from Point St. Helena is a high Rock, which to windward thereof runneth shoaling for the space of half a mile under water. It is distant about eight leagues, more or less, from the said Point, and is called Chanduy. At this place, and upon this Rock, was lost the ship aforementioned, that was ordered from these Seas, to the aid of our most gracious Sovereign King Charles the First, late King of England. Said ship had on board, as the Spaniards relate, to the sum of many millions of pieces of Eight; all which quantity of Plate was sent as a present unto our King, being then in his troubles, by the worthy Merchants of Lima. The Rock aforementioned lieth about two Leagues distant from the Main.  
August the 29th, this day our Pilot told us, that since we were to windward, 
A great 〈◊〉 vessel cast away.  a certain ship that was coming from Lima, bound for Guayaquil, ran ashore on Santa Clara, losing there in money, to the value of one hundred thousand pieces of Eight; which otherwise, peradventure, we might very fortunately have met withal. Moreover, that the Viceroy of Peru had Beheaded their great Admiral Ponce, for not coming to fight and destroy us, mean while we were at Gorgona. This evening we saw the Point of Santa Helena, at the distance of ten leagues to S.S.E. from us.  
August the 20th, 
Point St. Helen  this day we had both misty and cold weather. In the afternoon we saw la Punta de Santa Helena, at N. E. by N. and at seven leagues distance more or less.  
On Sunday, August the 21st, we had a fair and clear day. I reckoned myself this day to be about twenty five leagues to the Southward of Santa Helena.  
August the 22d. This morning about two of the clock we came close in with the shore. We found ourselves to be Leeward of a certain Point called Punta de Mero, 
Punta de Mero.  which is nothing else than a barren and rocky Point. Here runneth an eddy current under the shore.  
Tuesday, August the 23d. This day in the morning we had but little wind. At noon it blew fresh again. We made all day but short trips, and riffed topsails.  
Wednesday, August the 24th. This morning a great dew fell. At noon we were West from Cape Blanco. We found by observation Lat. 4 D. 13 S. We resolved now to bear up for Paita, 
They resolve for Paita.  and take it by surprisal if possible, thereby to provide ourselves with many necessaries that we wanted.   

CHAP. XXII. They arrive at Paita, where they are disappointed of their expectations, as not daring to land, seeing all the Country alarmed before them. They bear away for the Strait of Magallanes. Description of the Bay and Port of Paita, and Colan. An account of their Sailing towards the Straight aforementioned.  
THursday, August the 25th. The night before this day, 
They descry the land of Paita.  we stood off to Sea for fear of the shore, and lest we should be descried from the Coast of Paita, unto which we were now pretty nigh. About noon this day we began to stand in again, and saw the homing of land, though with hasey weather. The next day, being August the 26th, we had cold winds, great dews, and dry weather.  
Saturday, August the 27th. All this day, 
La Silla de Paita.  but more especially in the morning, we had many fogs. In the afternoon we saw la Silla de Paita at W. S. W. being about five leagues distant from it.  
Sunday August the 28th, last night about ten of the clock we were close in with land, at the distance of half a league, more or less to leeward of the Island of Lobos. 
Isle of Lobos.  We continued our course all that night, and about break of day found ourselves to be close under Pena Horadada, a high and steep rock so called. 
Pena Horadada.  From hence we sailed with a land-wind, and sent away from the ship two Canoas' well Manned and Armed, 
They endeavour to land.  with good hopes that we had conceived in our mind, to have taken the Town of Paita undiscryed. But as it should seem, they had already received news of our coming, or being upon that Coast, and also supplies of Forces that were sent them from the City of Piura, distant from thence twelve leagues up within the Country. These supplies consisted chief of three Companies of Horse and Foot, all of them being armed with fire-arms. Besides this, they had made for the defence of the Town, a breast-work along the seaside, and the great Church which lieth at the outermost part of the Town. From these places, as also from a hill that covereth the Town, they fired at our men, who were innocently rowing towards shore with their Canoas'. This preposterous firing was the preservation of our people. For had the Spaniards permitted our men to come ashore, they had assuredly destroyed them every man. But fear always hindereth that Nation of Victory, at least in most of our attempts.  
Our men perceiving themselves to be discovered, and the enemy prepared for their reception, hereupon retreated, 
They dare not to land.  and came on board the ship again without attempting to land, or do any thing else in relation to the taking of the place. We judged there could not be less than one hundred and fifty fire-arms, and four times as many Lances upon the shore, all in a readiness to hinder our people from landing. Within the Town our Pilot told us, there might be to the number of one hundred and fifty Families, more or less.  
Being disappointed of our expectations at Paita, we stood down the Bay towards Colan. 
A description of Colan.  This is another Town so called, and which exceedeth three times the bigness of Paita. It is chief inhabited by Fishermen, and from hence they send fish unto most inland Towns of Peru; and also serve Paita with water from the River Colan, not far distant from the Town. It is the space of two leagues more or less from the Town of Paita aforementioned to Colan, and from thence unto the River, one league, although the Houses of Colan do reach almost unto the River. The Town itself of Colan is only inhabited by Indians, and these are all rich; for as much as that they will be paid in ready money for every thing they do for the Spaniards. But the Town of Paita is chief inhabited by Spaniards, though there be also some Indians; but the Spaniards do not suffer the Indians to be any great gainers, or grow rich under them.  
About ten of the clock a young breeze sprang up, and with that, 
They stand away for the Strait of Magallanes.  we stood away West, and W. by S. Within a little while it blew so fresh, that we were forced to riff our topsails▪ the weather being very dark and hasey. I took the Port of Paita, and Bay of Colan, as they lay exactly situated, thus.  
A Description of Paita and Colan  
Monday, August the 29th. All our hopes of doing any farther good upon the Coasts of the South Sea, being now frustrated, seeing we were descried before our arrival wherever we came, we resolved unanimously to quit all other attempts, and bear away for the Strait of Magallanes, in order to our return homewards either for England, or some of our Plantations in the West-Indies. This day we had a great dew, and I reckoned myself W. S. W. from Paita thirteen leagues and an half, with very little wind. So we stood East.  
The next day, August the 30th, we had misty weather. We made a W.S. W. way, and by it five leagues and one third. In the afternoon of this day, the wind freshned again, having been but little before, and we stood E.S.E.  
The last day of August we had very fair weather. I believed now that the wind was settled at S. E. and S. S. E. We made a S. S. W. way, and twenty one leagues and two thirds.  
September the First. The night past was very cloudy, but withal we had a fresh gale. Our reckoning was a S. W by S. way, and that we had made sixteen leagues and two thirds.  
September the 2d we reckoned a S. W. way, and by it twenty six leagues and two thirds. This day we had an observation, and found Lat. 7 D. 40 S.  
September the 3d brought us both cloudy and misty weather. We made a W.S.W. way, and fourteen leagues.  
September the 4th. This day the wind was at E. S. E. and sometimes E. coming in many flaws. We had a S. W. by S. way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and two thirds. We had a great Sea from the South.  
Monday, September the 5th, we had great winds, and a high and short Sea. Our way was S. S. W. and half W. by which we reckoned twenty eight leagues and two thirds of a league.  
September the 6th we had a very fresh wind at S. E. by E. with an indifferent smooth Sea. By observation we found this day Latitude 12 d. 00 South. We made a S.W. by S. way, and twenty eight leagues and one third.  
Wednesday September the seventh, we had a very fresh wind. We reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and thirty six leagues. We observed Latitude 13 d. 24 South. We make now each mess a plumb Pudding of Salt-water and wine-Lees.  
On the eighth we enjoyed a fresh gale of wind, though with hasey weather. Our reckoning was a S.W. by S. way, and hereby twenty five leagues, and one third of a league.  
September the 9th, we made a S.W. by S. way, and twenty one leagues and a third. In the afternoon the wind came about something more Southerly, allowing us a S. W. course.  
Saturday September the 10th, all the night past and this morning the wind was very fresh at East. Our way was S.S.W. and by our reckoning thirty five leagues and one third. The weather now was warm. An observation this day gave us Lat. 16 d. 40. South.  
September 11 we had whiffling winds. A South-west half South way, and thereby twelve leagues and two thirds. By an observation made we found 17 d. 10 South. Now we had a very great Sea, so that we took in our spritsail.  
September the 12th, all the night before this day, we were under a pair of courses. Yet this morning we heaved out main topsail. We made a W. S. W. way, and seventeen leagues and one third. By observation we found Lat. 17 d. 30 South.  
The 13th, in the night passed we had huge and great storms of wind. In the morning our Goose-head gave way, so that about noon we were forced to lie by till four in the afternoon to mend it. Our course was S. W. half W. and our reckoning twenty nine leagues, and two thirds of a league. Latitude by observation 18 d. 12 South.  
Wednesday September the 14th, this day we had very hasey weather. We made a S.S.W. way, and twenty leagues.  
September the 15th, this day likewise we had a S.S.W. way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and one half. Our observation taken this day gave us 20 d. 09. South.  
On September the 16th, we had a clear day, a S. W. half South way, and made sixteen leagues and two thirds, We found by observation, Lat. 20 d. 48 South.  
The 17th, last night was very calm. Also this day, it being a full Moon. We reckoned a S.W. way, and only by reason of the calmness of the weather nine leagues and one third of a league. We had an observation which afforded us 21 d. 08 S. Latitude.  
Sunday September the 18th, in the night last past a wind sprang up at S.S.E. which the morning of this day freshned at S. E. We made a W. S. W. way, and by it eighteen leagues. Moreover, this day we had a clear observation that shown us Lat. 21 d. 30 S.  
September the 19th, all the night passed we had a very fresh wind. But this morning it came about to E. by S. and E.S.E. with hasey weather. I reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and twenty two leagues.  
September the 20th, this day gave us a fresh wind, hasey weather, a S. by W. way, and hereupon twenty three leagues and one third.  
September the 21, this day also the fresh gale continued, with cloudy, and sometimes misty weather. Our reckoning shown us a S. by W. way, as the day before, and by it twenty eight leagues and one third. By an observation made, we found Lat. 25 d. 15 South.  
Thursday September the 22, this day we had a very fresh wind. We reckoned a South half West way, and by that twenty nine leagues and two thirds. An observation taken gave us Lat. 26 d. 42 South. We observed this day a North East Sea, 
A North East Sea.  which seemed very strange unto us.  
The next day we had several showers of small rain. My reckoning was a S. by W. way; and thereupon twenty six leagues. We found by observation Lat. 27. d. 57 South.  
September the 24th, we had hasey weather, and the wind not so fresh at E. S. E. with a smooth Sea. We made a S. S. W. way half westerly, and twenty three leagues and two thirds. This day also an observation gave us Lat. 28 d. 57 South. I reckoned now that we were distant from Paita 302 leagues and two thirds.  
Sunday September the 25th, this day we had not much wind, and withal, hasey weather. At noon the wind came East, than E.N.E. and then again N.E. by E. We reckoned a S. by E. way, half Easterly and 55.  
Monday the 26th, we had hasey weather and a fresh wind at N. East. We reckon a S.E. half South way, and twenty four leagues. In the afternoon we experimented a N.N.E. Sea, and then soon after a N.N.E. wind. After this a North wind, and that but very little.  
September the 27th, all the night before this day we had a fresh wind at N.N.E. About eight this morning it came about again to N.N.W. We made a S.E. by S. way, and thirty eight leagues. By observation I found Lat. 32 d. 30 South. Now we enjoyed a very smooth sea, and fair weather.  
Wednesday September the 28th, in the night past a very fresh wind at N.N.W. and N.W. At break of day we had a wind at .... heaving us a back at once. At noon again the wind was at S.W. our course being S.E. This morning we took down our top gallant-masts. We made a S.E. by E. way, and on this road twenty seven leagues and two thirds. We found by an observation made, Lat. 33 d. 16 South, a South west sea.  
On the 29th we had very windy and hasey weather, with some rain now and then. All last night we handed our main topsail. We made a S.E. by E. way, and thirty two leagues and two thirds. We had a South west sea and wind.  
Friday September the 30th, this day we had fresh winds between S. W. and W. We reckoned a S. E. half South way, and thereupon forty four leagues. By observation we found Lat. 35 d. 54 South.  
October the first, the wind this day was not very fresh, but varying. My reckoning was a S. E. half South way, and twenty four leagues. An observation gave us 36 d. 50 South. 
Another Quadrant made by the Author.  This day I finished another Quadrant, being the third I finished in this Voyage. We had a South west sea, with showers of rain and gusts of wind.  
Sunday October the second, the wind this day was hanging between W.N.W. ' and N.W. by N. We made a S.E. by S. way, and thirty three leagues and two thirds. By observation we found 38 d. 14 South. About noon we had a fresh wind at N.W. and S.W.  
October the third, the last night in the forepart thereof was clear, but the latter was rainy. The wind very fresh at N.W. by N. But this day we had little wind, and cloudy weather. A S. W. by W. wind, and a S.E. by S. way, by which we reckoned thirty three leagues and one third of a league.  
October the fourth, we had a clear night and a very fresh wind. We reckoned a S. E. by S. way, and thereby forty three leagues. An observation taken showed us, that we were in Lat. 41 d. 34 South. This day also fell several showers of rain.  
October the fifth, we had a windy night the last past, and a clear day. We reckoned a S.S.E. half E. way, and forty four leagues and two thirds. By an observation made, we found Lat. 43 d. 26 South. The weather now was very windy, causing a huge tempestuous sea. The wind at N.W. and N.W. by N. blowing very high.  
October the sixth, this day the wind was still at N.W. and yet not so fresh as it was yesterday, the weather very foggy and misty. As for the wind it came in gusts, so that we were forced to hand our topsails, and spritsail. We reckoned a S. E. half S. way, and thereby forty three leagues and one third of a league. The Seas now were not so high, as for some days past. In the evening we scudded away under our fore course.  
Friday, October the 7th. Last night was very cloudy, and this day both dark and foggy weather with small rain. We made a S. E. way, and thirty leagues and two thirds. A fresh wind at N. N. W. and N. W. We keep still under a fore course, not so much for the freshness of the wind, as the closeness of the weather.  
October the 8th, we had a clear night the night before this day, and withal a strong gale; 
A great storm.  insomuch that this day we were forced to take in our foresail, and loosen our Mizzen, which was soon blown to pieces. Our eldest Seamen said that they were never in the like storm of wind before. The Sea was all in a foam. In the evening it dulled a little. We made a S. E. half E. way, and eighteen leagues, with very dark weather.  
Sunday, October the 9th. All the night passed we had a furious W. N. W. wind. We set our sail a drough, 
They drive at a great rate.  and so drove to the Southward very much, and almost incredibly, if an observation had not happened, which gave us Lat. 48 15 S. We had a very stiff gale at W. N. W. with a great Sea from W. which met with a S. S. W. Sea as great as it. Now the weather was very cold, and we had one or two frosty mornings. Yesterday in the afternoon we had a very great storm of hail. At noon we bent another Mizzen.  
Monday, Octob. the 10th. This day brought us a freshwind at N. W. and N. N. W, We made a S. E. half E. way, and by it forty four leagues. By observation we found Lat. 49 D. 41 S. I reckoned myself now to be East from Paita sixty nine leagues and an half.  
Tuesday, October the 11th. Last night we had a small time calm. This day was both cloudy and rainy weather. The wind at S. W. and S. S. W. so furious, that at ten of the clock this morning we scudded under a main sail. At noon we lowered our fore-yard while we sailed. We made a S. E. by E. way, and thirty leagues.   

CHAP. XXIII. The Bucaniers arrive at a place incognito, unto which they give the name of the Duke of Yorks Islands. A description of the said Islands, and of the Gulf, or Lagoon, wherein they lie, so far as it was searched. They remain there many days by stress of weather, not without great dangers of being lost. An account of some other things remarkable that happened there.  
WEdnesday, October the 12th. All the night before this day we had many high winds. I reckoned an E. S. E. way, and twenty leagues; for our vessel drove at a great rate. Moreover, that we were in Lat. 50 D. 50 S. So that our Easting from Paita by my account ought to be one hundred and one leagues, or thereabouts.  
This morning about two hours before day, we happened by great accident to espy land. 
They see land before day, and are miraculously preserved  It was the great mercy of God, which had always attended us in this Voyage, that saved us from perishing at this time; for we were close ashore before we saw it; and our fore-yard, which we most needed in this occasion, was taken down. The land we had seen was very high and towering; and here appeared to be many Islands scattered up and down. We steered in with what caution we could, between them and the Main, and at last, God be praised, arrived at a place or rather Bay, where we perceived ourselves to be land-lockt, and as we thought pretty safe from the danger of those tempestuous Seas. From hence we sent away our Canoa to sound and search the fittest place for anchoring. At this time one of our men, 
One of their me● drowned.  named Henry Shergall, as he was going into our spritsail top, happened to fall into the water, and was drowned before any help could be had unto him, though we endeavoured it as much as we possibly could. This accident several of our company did interpret as a bad Omen of the place; which proved not so, through the providence of the Almighty, though many dangers were not wanting here unto us, as I shall relate.  
We came to an anchor in the depth of forty fathom Water, more or less, 
They came to an anchor.  and yet at no greater distance than a stones cast from shore. The water where we anchored was very smooth, and the high lands round about all covered with snow. Having considered the time of the year, and all other circumstances, we resolved, that in case we could find a sufficient stock of provisions here, 
They resolve to stay here.  we would stay the longer, that is, until Summer came, or something more, before we prosecuted our intended Voyage homewards through the straits of Magallanes; which now we began to be careful how to find. That day of our anchoring in this Bay, we shot six or eight brave Geese, 
They kill Geese and Fowls.  and some smaller fowl besides. Here we found also many hundreds of Mussel-banks; all which were very plentifully stocked with that kind of fish. We buried our dead man on the shore, giving him several Volleys for his Funeral-Rites, according to the custom. In the night of this day our anchor came home, so that we were forced to let go a grappling to secure ourselves. But still every flaw of wind drove us. Hereupon we set our spritsail, 
They are in danger.  and ran about a mile into another Bay, where we let go another anchor, and thus anchored again. The first anchor, which was also the biggest in our ship, we lost by this accident, the cable being cut by the rocks. Unto these Islands aforementioned our Captain gave the name of His Royal Highness the Duke of Yorks Islands.  
Thursday, October the 13th. This day we began to moor our ship, 
They moor their vessel.  she driving as we easily could perceive with every flaw of wind that blew. The tide sloweth here full seven foot up and down. We moored our Vessel into a rockey point, being a key whereof there be many in the circumference of this Bay. The ground of the bottom of the said Bay we found was hard and sandy, being here and there rockey. This evening we brought on board great store of Lamperts, of which we made a kettle of broth, that contained more than all our company could eat.  
On Friday October the 14th, we killed several Geese. As also many of another sort of Fowl like unto an Eagle, but having a bigger beak, 
A strange seafowl.  with their nostrils rising from the top of the middle of their beak by a hand trunk. This Fowl liveth on Fish, but we saw none. Yesterday in the evening there fell a great fleet of snow on the hills, round about the Bay, but none where we were at anchor. Moreover, this day in the evening we caught Lamperts in great quantity, 
Multitudes of Lamperts and Mussels.  being three times as many as we could eat. Our men in ranging the Keys for Game, found grass plaited above a fathom long, and a knot tied at the end thereof. In like manner on other Keys they found Mussels and Lampert shells. From these things we presently concluded, 
They find tokens of the Inhabitants·  that these Countries were inhabited, and that some Indians or others were to be found hereabouts.  
Saturday October the 15th, in the night last passed we had much rain, 
Another storm.  with large hailstones. About midnight the wind came to North with such great fury, that the Tree unto which our Cable was fastened on shore, gave way, and came up by the Roots. All those gusts of wind were mixed with violent storms of rain and hail. Thus we fastened again unto other trees. But here it happened, that our ship coming up to the shore, our Rudder touched, and thereupon broke our Goose-neck. Great was now our extremity, and greater it will be, 
They are in great danger.  if God send not better weather. Scarce a minute now passed without flaws of wind and rain.  
Sunday October the 16th, all the night past was rainy, as before. 
Much rain.  About nine of the clock our biggest harser gave way and brake. All this day likewise we had rain with several showers of hail, and but little wind to westward of the North.  
Monday October the 17th, all last night until five this morning, it ceased not to rain. Then until ten it snowed. On the hills it snowed all the night long. 
Tracts of people.  This day we haunted on the shore many tracts of people hereabouts, but could find none hitherto, they having fled and concealed themselves for fear of us, as we supposed.  
October the 18th. In the night passed we had much rain and hail. But the day was very clear. Hereupon we made an observation, which gave us Lat. 50 D. 40 S. Moreover, this day we had pretty warm weather.  
October the 19th. Both a clear and frosty night the last past. This day was hasey, and something windy from the North quarter. Every day we had plenty of Lamperts, and Mussels of a very large size.  
October the 20th. The night past was rainy, 
Another storm.  and this day windy, with very great gusts of wind at N.N.W. until the afternoon. Then we had wind at N. W. being very fresh and in gusts.  
October the 21st. All the night past was tempestuous, 
Which continueth.  with huge gusts of wind and showers of hail. Yesterday in the evening we carried a cable ashore, and fastened it unto a tree. This being done, at midnight our biggest cable broke in the middle. 
New dangers.  Towards morning we had much snow. In the day, great gusts of wind with large hail stones, and also great plenty of Lamperts.  
October the 22d. Last night we had strange gusts of wind from N. W. together with much hail and rain. This day we killed a Penguin; and also began to carry water on board. 
Penguin.   
October the 23d. 
Much rain still  All the twenty four hours last passed we had much rain. The wind was but little at W. and W. S. W.  
October the 24th. All this time until noon nothing but rain. At that time it held up fair for the space of half an hour, or thereabouts, and then it reigned again all the rest of the day.  
October the 25th. All this while we had not one minute fair. Towards evening it held up from raining, but the weather was cloudy, and withal much warmer than when we came hither at first. 
〈◊〉 weather.   
Wednesday, October the 26th. All the night past, and this forenoon, we had fair weather. But after noon it reigned again. We found Cockles like unto those we have in England. 
〈◊〉.   
Thursday, October the 27th. In the night passed we had much rain, 
A n●w storm.  with very gr●at gusts of wind, lasting for the whole space thereof. Yet notwithstanding, this day proved to be the fairest that we ever had since we came into this place. In the evening of this day, our Canoa which was gone to search the adjacent places for Indians, or what else they could find, returned unto the ship, with a Doree at her stern. They had gone, as it should seem, beyond the old Bay where we first anchored, and thereabouts happened to meet with this Doree. In it were three Indians, who perceiving themselves nigh being taken, 
They take a Doree and one prisoner. H●● habit.  leapt overboard to make their escape. Our men in pursuing them did unadvisedly shoot one of them dead. A second, being a woman, escaped their hands. But the third, who was a lusty boy about eighteen years of age, was taken, and him they brought on board the ship. He was covered only with a Seals skin, having no other clothing about him: His eyes were squinted, and his hair was cut pretty short. In the middle of the Doree they had a fire burning either for dressing of victuals, or some other use. The Doree itself was built sharp at both ends, and flat bottomed. They had a net to catch Penguins, and a club like unto our bandies, called by them a Tomahunks. His Language we could not understand, but withal he pointed up the Lagoon, giving us to understand, that there were more people thereabouts. This was confirmed by our men, who also said they had seen more. They had Darts to throw against an Eenemy pointed with wood.  
On the next day, being October the 28th, in the evening our Canoa went from the ship again to seek for more Indians. They went into several Lagoons, 
They search for more people, but find none.  and searched them narrowly. But they could find nothing else than two or three Huts; all the Natives being fled before our arrival. In the evening they returned unto the ship, bringing with them very large Lamperts, and also Mussels which were six inches and an half long. 
Huge Mussels.  Our Indian prisoner could open Mussels these with his fingers, which our men could not so hreadily do with their knives. Both the night past and this day we add very fair weather.  
On the 29th we had in like manner a very fair day, and also a smooth wind at S. S. E. Our Indian this day pointed unto us, that there were men in this Country, or not far off from hence, with great beards. He appeared unto us by his actions to be very innocent and foolish. But by his carriage I was also persuaded that he was a Man-eater. This day likewise we caught Lamperts enough to suffice us for the morrow.  
Sunday, October the 30th. This day was fair, and there blew a small S. S. E. wind. 
They can find neither provisions nor Indians.  In the morning we sent a Canoa over to the Eastward-shore, to seek either for provisions or Indians. I myself could not go, as I desired, being with two or three more, at that time very much tormented with the Gripes. I am persuaded that this place where we now were, is not so great an Island as some Hydrographers do lay it down, but rather an Archipelago of smaller Islands. We saw this day many Penguins, but they were so shy, that we could not come near them. 
Penguins.  They pad on the water with their wings very fast, but their bodies are too heavy to be carried by the said wings. The Sun now made the weather very warm, 
Warm weather  insomuch that the snow melted apace.  
October the 31st. Both last night and this day were very fair. At noon our Canoa returned from the Eastern shore, bringing word they had found several good Bays and Harbours, that were deep even close unto the shore. Only that there lay in them several sunken Rocks, the which we had also where we were. But these Rocks are not dangerous to shipping, by reason they have weeds which lie two fathoms in circumference about them. This morning blew a small wind at N.N.E.  
November the first, this day was also fair, and we had a small wind as before, at N.N.E.  
November the second, last night I took the Polar distance of the South star of the Cock's foot, and found it to be 28 d. 25. I observed also the two Magallan Clouds, of which I made mention in this Journal before, and found them to be as followeth, viz. the lesser 14 d. 05. and the greater 14 d. 25. The morning of this day we hoisted an end our top-masts, and also brought too a Main-top-sail, and Foresail, and finished our filling all the water we needed. At the same time the wind hung Easterly, and I was still much tormented with the Gripes as before.  
November the third, this morning we hanged our Rudder, 
They make ready to departed.  the greatest piece of work we had to do, after those violent storms abovementioned. In the afternoon we halled in our two biggest Harsers; and also our biggest Cable from the shore. For the three days last passed we had a very great and dark fog between us and the Eastward shore. We had now very little wind in the Cove where we were, but abroad at sea there blue at the same time a stiff gale at S.S.E. Moreover, we could perceive now, the stormy weather being blown over, much small fry of fish about the ship, whereof we could see none, as was mentioned before. This day we had a very clear and calm evening.  
November the fourth, both all last night and this day we had very calm weather. 
Calm weather again.  And this morning a small breeze sprang up at N. and N.N.E. which afterwards wheeled about unto S. and S.S.E. This morning we hoist our Main and Fore-yards; and likewise fetched off from the shore our other harser and Cable, into the depth of eleven fathom water. Our resolutions were now changed for a departure, in order to seek the mouth of the straits of Magallanes, seeing that we could not winter here, for want of Provisions, which we could not find either on the Continent, or about these Islands aforementioned. The weather now was very warm, or rather hot, and the Birds did sing as sweetly as those in England. We saw here both Thrushes and Black birds, and many other sorts of those that are usually seen in our own Country.  
Saturday November the fifth, this morning brought us a wind at N.N.E. hereupon, we warped unto a rocky point, 
They sail away  thereby to get out of the Cove where we lay. For our anchor came home unto us as we were carrying our Warp out. At this time a second breeze came up very fresh in our stern; so that we took the opportunity thereof, and went away before it. By noon this day we hoist in our Canoas', and also turned away lose unto the sea our Indian Doree. As for the Indian boy whom we had taken in said Doree, we kept him still prisoner, and called him Orson. Our Cove at our departure from this place, looked thus, as I took then the description thereof. When we were come out into the Channel, the weather grew stark calm. Only now and then we had a small breeze, sometimes from one quarter, and then from another. By this slackness of wind we observed, that the Current hoist us to the Southward. On the East-side of this Lagoon, we perceived the Indians to make a great smoke at our departure.  
A description of his Royal▪ Highnesses Isles  
We had a very fair day till six in the evening, when we got without the mouth of the Gulf, it blew so hard, that in an hour it forced us to hand our topsails. Having now a fit gale at N. W. and N. N W. we stood S. W. by W. to clear ourselves of some breaks which lie four Leagues from the Gulfs mouth at S. and S. S. E. Hereabouts we saw many riffs and rocks, which occasioned us to stand close halled. I have drawn here and given unto my Reader, so much as I have seen of the Gulf itself; the rest must be completed in due time by them, that have greater opportunities of making a farther search into it, than I had at the time of our stay here under such tempestuous weather, as I have described, and the distemper which hung upon me at the same time.  
A description of the English Gulf Lying a little to the Northward of Magallanes straits.   

CHAP. XXIV. They depart from the English Gulf in quest of the Strait of Magallanes which they cannot find. They return home by an unknown way, never Navigated before.  
SUnday November the sixth, this morning we had lost the sight of land, so that we could see it no more. All the night last passed, and this day, we were under our two Courses and Spritsail. The weather this day was hasey. My reckoning was a S.W. half South way, and by it twenty one Leagues. We had now an indifferent high Sea, and a fresh wind at N.N.W.  
November the seventh, 
Variation of the Needle found here.  last night was both rainy and foggey, but in the morning it cleared up. The wind for the most part was at W. and W. N. W. But at noon it came about at W. S. W. Our reckoning was a S. W. by S. way, and by it twenty Leagues. We found by observation Lat. 52 d. 03. We now steered away S.S.E. the wind being at that time at W.S.W. In the evening of this day I found a variation of the Needle to N.E. to the number of 15 d. or better. I was still troubled with the Gripes as I had been before.  
November the eighth, we had a fair night the last past. About midnight the wind came to N.N.W. This day early, at the break of day, we all were persuaded that we had seen Land, but at noon we saw that it was none, but only a Cloud. The wind was now at North. My reckoning was a S.E. half East way, and thirty two leagues and one third of a league. We had an observation that gave us 53 d. 27 South. The whole day was very fine and warm, and we saw great numbers of Fowls and Seals.  
November the ninth, yesterday in the evening the weather was cloudy. Hereupon we lay by under a main-course. After midnight we sailed East, and E. by N. with a fresh wind at W. N. W. and not any great Sea. The day itself was cloudy, and toward noon we had some rain. So at two in the afternoon we lay by under a Main course, the wind being fresh at N. W. I reckoned an E. N. E. way, and thereby twenty eight Leagues.  
Thursday November the tenth, all the night last passed we lay under a Main-course, 
Astorm.  with a mere fret of wind at N.W. and N.N.W. Day being come, the wind did rather increase; insomuch, that about noon our sail blew to pieces. Hereupon we were forced to lower the yard, and unbend the sail, lying for a little while under a Mizzen. But that also soon gave way. So that all the rest of this day we lay a hull in very dark weather, foggy and windy, with a huge sea, which often times rolled over us. In the afternoon it seemed to abate for some space of time; but soon after it blew worse than before, which compelled us to lower our Fore-yard.  

 November the tenth, all the night last passed we had furious windy and tempestuous weather, from the points of N.W. and N. N. W. together with Seas higher and higher. In the evening we set our Mizzen. At which time the Sun appeared very waterish; but the wind now abated by degrees, and the Seas also.  
November the twelfth, this morning little wind was stirring▪ but only some rain fell. About ten it cleared up, and by an observation then made, we found Lat. 55 d. 25. The Sea was now much fallen, and a fresh wind was sprung up at W. and W.S. W. We experimented also a very great current to the S. W. In the afternoon of this day we set our sails again, resolving now unanimously together, to make for the straits of St. Vincent, otherwise called the straits of Fernando de Magallanes. We had a fresh wind at W.N.W. our course being S.S.E. under our Spritsail, Fore-●●●l, and Fore-top-sail. This day we saw many Fishes, or rather Fowls, 
 who had heads like unto Muscovia Ducks, as also two feet like unto them. They had two Fins like the fore-fins of Turtles: white breasts and bellies; their beak and eyes being red. They are full of Feathers on their bodies, and their hinder parts are like unto those of a Seal, wherewith they cut the water. The Spaniard calleth these Fowls Paxaros Ninos. They weigh most commonly about six or seven pound, being about one foot, a little more or less in length. Our Commander Captain Sharp, had so much dexterity as to strike two of them. In the evening we set also our Mainsail; the wind now coming to the Southward of the West.  
Sunday November the 13th, all the night passed we had a fresh wind between S.W. and W.N.W. with sometimes mists of small rain. In the evening we enjoyed a fine leading gale at W. N. W. together with both clear and wholesome weather. We made a S.E. way, and by it forty two leagues and two thirds. This day an observation gave us Lat. 56 d. 55 South. We still experimented a great S. W. current. In the afternoon of this day we steered E.S.E. and in the evening had whiffling winds.  
November the 14th, both last night and this morning we had cloudy weather. About eight it cleared up. My reckoning was a S.E. by E. way, and by it thirty two leagues. Our observation gave us Lat. 57 d. 50. South. This day we could perceive land, 
They see Land.  and at noon were due West from it. In the evening we stood E. by S.  
November the 15th, all the night past was very cloudy. 
But lose it again.  We judged now that we should be close in with the Land we had seen the day before, but the morning being come we could see none. In the night much snow fell, and in the day we had great fleets thereof, the weather being very cold and cloudy. I reckoned an E.S.E. way, and hereby twenty nine leagues and two thirds. Moreover, that our Latitude was 58 d. 25 S. The wind was now so fresh at North, that we were forced to lie under our two Courses and Spritsail.  
Novembe the 16th, most of this time we had still rain and snow, but now no night at all, though the weather was dark. The wind was various, but from midnight before this day, 
They altar their course.  the wind was at S.E. and S.S.E. We now lay E.N.E. I reckoned a N.E. by E. way, and twenty three leagues. About four in the afternoon two of our fore-shrouds bolts broke, but withal, were presently mended. This afternoon also we saw a very large Whale. In the evening we handed in our foretop sail, 
A Whale seen.  and lay under our pair of Courses, and Spritsail, the evening being very clear.  
November the 17th, in the night passed there was a very hard frost. 
Great Islands of Ice.  At four this morning we saw two or three Islands of Ice, the distance of two or three leagues to the Southward of us. Soon after this, we saw several others, the biggest of them being at least two leagues round. By an observation made this day, we found Lat. 58 d. 23 South. We had now a vehement current to the Southward. At noon I saw many others of these Islands of Ice aforementioned, of which some were so long, that we could scarce see the end of them, and were extant about ten or twelve fathom above water. The weather in the mean while was very clear, and the wind cold. I found variation of the Needle eighteen degrees to the North East. 
Variation of the Needle.   
November the 18th, all the night past was very fair. I must call it night; 
No night hereabouts.  for otherwise it was not dark at all. The Sea was very smooth, and the wind at N. and N.N.W. I reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and by the same twenty two leagues. At ten it grew stark calm, which held all the afternoon of this day. But at night we had a wind again at N. and N. by E.  
November the 19th, this day was cloudy with snow, and a frosty night preceding it. The wind now was so fresh at North, that we were forced to take in our topsails, and lie all day under our Courses and Spritsail. We made by an E.S.E. way, eighteen leagues and two thirds.  
November the twentieth, we had a cloudy night the last past, 
A great fog.  together with mis●ing rain and snow. This morning fell so great a fog, that we could not see from stem to stern of our ship. From ten of the clock last night we had also a calm and very cold weather. But what was worse than all this, 
A short allowance.  we were now kept to a very short allowance of our sorry victuals; our Provisions growing very scanty with us. About ten this morning we had a very small breeze at North. 
Extremity of cold.  Several of our men were not able to endure the cold, so fierce it was, whereby they were forced to lie and keep themselves as close as they could. We made an East way, and by the same sixteen leagues. This day at noon I reckoned myself to be East from the Gulf, from whence we last departed, two hundred and five leagues and two thirds of a league.  
Monday November the 21, 
Land Fowls seen yet no Land.  last evening we caught a small and white land fowl, and saw two or three more; and also this morning. This sight afforded us good hopes we were not far distant from some Coast or other, yet none we could see in all this long and tedious voyage. In the night passed we had a calm, and all this morning a great fog with much snow and rain. We reckoned an E. by N. way, and ten leagues. At one in the afternoon we had a fresh gale that sprang up at East, and at E. by N.  
November the 22, most part of this day was calm. In the mean while we could observe our ship to drive East. My reckoning was an E. N. E. way, and thereby thirteen leagues and one third. At one in the afternoon we had a small gale at W. S. W. our course being N. N. E. and N. E. by N.  
November the 23, this day we had a gale at N.W. and freshning still more and more; so that we were forced to take in our topsails and spritsail. The wind was not a settled gale, but often varied from point to point. At noon it came at N. E. and our course was then N. N. W. By a North way we reckoned sixteen leagues.  
November the 24th, both the night past and this morning was foggy weather, with some calms between times. But at eight in the morning the Sun broke out, though notwithstanding the day was not clear. By a N.N.E. way we reckoned fifteen leagues. This morning the wind came about to East, and by noon it was again at N.E. We had a clear evening and a fresh gale.  
November the 25th, all the night passed we had a fresh wind at E. and E.N.E. Insomuch, that at eight in the morning we took in our topsails. But at noon the wind was not so fresh as it had been before. I reckoned a N.N.W. half West way, and by the same twenty leagues.  
November the 26th, last night the wind was not altogether so fresh as before; but this morning it was again very high. The weather was both dark and cloudy, and brought now and then rain and snow. We made a N.N.E. way, and hereby thirty leagues. The wind all along E. by S. and E. S. E. In the evening we had fair weather again. We experimented for the ten days last past a great Western Sea, and saw in the same time several Seals.  
Sunday November the 27th, all the night passed we enjoyed a fresh gale and clear weather. I reckoned thirty six leagues by a N. E. by N. way. By an observation made, we now found Lat. 52 d. 48 South. 
30 d. variation of the Need●●.  And I judged myself to be East from the Gulf, two hundred eighty five leagues. In the evening of this day we had a very exact sight of the Sun, and found above 30 d. variation of the Needle. From whence ought to be concluded, that it is very difficult to direct a course of Navigation in these parts. 
Observation.  For in the space of only twenty five leagues sailing, we have experimented eight or nine degrees difference of variation, by a good Dutch Azimouth Compass.  
November the 28th, all last night we had a fresh wind at E.S.E. 
More land Fowls seen, but no land.  Towards morning we had but little wind, all the day being hasey weather. This day we saw a whole flight of such Land-fowles, of which sort we killed one before, as was mentioned above. This sight gave us occasion to believe, that neither then, nor at this present, we were not far distant from land, and yet we descried none in the residue of this whole voyage. We made by a N. N. E. way, thirty three leagues. Yesterday in the evening we set a new spritsail, and about three this morning we also set our mainsail. At one afternoon, the wind came about N. E. and N. N. E. which in the evening blew very fresh, with cloudy weather.  
November the 29th. The night proved very cloudy, and the wind blew very fresh at E. N. E. and N. E. by E. This morning it was at East, both with snow, and hail. Towards noon the weather cleared up, and we found by an observation taken, Lat. 49 D 45 S. Our reckoning was a North way, and thirty leagues. This day we had a short Eastern sea, and withal, a very cold evening. I took the Sun, and hereby I found variation 26 D. 30. unto the North East. This night the wind came about W. and W. N. W. continuing so all the night.  
November the 30th. This day the wind was N. and N. N. E. with some clouds hover in the sky. At this time we had already almost four hours of night. 
Four hours of night.  The morning of this day was very fair and clear. Hereupon for to give myself satisfaction in the point, as fearing the truth of Spanish Books; I worked the true Amplitude of the Sun, and found his variation to be 26 25 to the N. E. being very conformable to what I had both read and experimented before. Hereabouts, also we experimented a current to the Northward. Moreover, this day we saw much rock-weed, which renewed our hopes, 
Rock-weed.  once more of seeing land. We reckoned a N. E. way and by the same twenty two leagues. By an observation made we found Lat. 48 D. 53 S. This day also we saw several of those fowl-fish afore described called Paxaros-ninos; 
Paxaros-ninos  and these of a larger size, than any we had seen before. In the afternoon, the wind came about at N. N. E. whereby we stood N. W. by W. with a fresh gale, and smooth water. The weather now began to grow warmer, than hitherto, and the evening of this day was clear.  
Tuesday December the first. The latter part of the night past was very cloudy, and also sometimes rainy. About midnight we had a furious and violent Tornado, 
Several Tornadoes.  forcing us in a moment to hand in our topsails. At five in the morning we set them again, and at eleven, we had another Tornado, forcing us to hand our topsails the second time. We made a N. N. E. two thirds East way, and thereby thirteen leagues and two thirds of a league. The afternoon of this stormy day, proved very fair, and the wind came to W. S. W. our course being N. E. by N. In the evening the wind freshned, with cloudy weather.  

Which continue  December the second. Last night we experimented a very furious whirlwind, which notwithstanding, it pleased God, did pass about the length of our ship, to Westward of us. However, we handed in our topsails, and halled up our low-sails, in the brails. After the whirlwind came a fresh storm of large hailstones, in the night, and several Tornadoes; but God be thanked, they all came large of our ship. We now made a great way under a fore-course and spritsail. At four of the clock this morning, our foresail split, whereby we were forced to lower our fore-yard. At half an hour after ten we hoisted it again with a furious S. W. wind. We made a N. E. by E. way, and by the same forty seven leagues and an half. By observation we now had Lat. 46 D. 54 S. We riffed our foresail, with respect to the violence of the wind. But in the evening, this rather increased, and we had a very great Sea. Our standing rigging, through the fury of this gale, gave way in several places, but was soon mended again.  

Warm weather  December the third. The wind all the night past, was very fresh, with several flaws both of wind and rain, at S. W. and S. W. by S. We enjoyed now very warm weather. This morning we set our fore-top-sail. Our reckoning gave us, a N. E. half E. way and forty five leagues. We found Lat. by observation 45 D. 28 S. This day at noon, a large shoal of young Porpoises came about our ship, and played up and down. 
Porpoises.   
December the 4th. All the night passed we had a fresh gale at W. S. W. The night was clear, only that now and then we had a small cloud affording some rain. In the morning, from four of the clock till eight it reigned. But than it cleared up again, with a S. W. wind and a very smooth sea. We made by a N. E. one quarter N. way, thirty nine leagues. By observation we found Lat. 44 D. 01 S. At noon the wind came to S. S. W. our course then being N. N. E. This day we agreed among ourselves having the consent of our commander, 
A dividend made of eight chests of mon  to share the eight chests of money, which as yet were remaining unshared. Yesterday in the evening, we let out the reiff of our foresail, and hoisted up our fore-yard. This evening I found variation 17 D. N. E.  
Monday, December the 5th. All the night past, a clear night, and this a fair day, with a fresh wind at S.S. W. We reckoned a N. E. 5. D. N. way, and by the same forty two leagues. An observation gave us Lat. 42 D. 29. S. This afternoon we shared of the chests abovementioned, three hundred pieces of eight each man. 
300 p. 8. to each ma●  I now reckoned myself to be East from my departure four hundred seventy one leagues and one third of a league. At night again we shared twenty two pieces of eight more to each.  
December the 6th. We had a clear star-light-night the last and a fair morning this day, with a fresh gale at S. W. At noon we took in our fore-top-sail. We reckoned a N. E. half N. way, and hereby fifty leagues and two thirds. An observation taken afforded us 40 D. 31 S. This evening was cloudy.  
December the 7th. The night was both windy and cloudy. At one in the morning, we took in our topsails, and at three, handed our spritsail, and so we scudded away before the wind, which now was very fresh at West. This morning a gust of wind came and tore our mainsail into an hundred pieces, which made us put away before the wind, till we could provide for that accident. My reckoning was a N. E. three quarters E. way, and by the same thirty three leagues. By observation we found Lat. 39 D. 37 S. We had now a great Sea, and a fresh wind At three in the afternoon we set another foresail; the first being blown to pieces. Moreover, at the same time we furled our spritsail. At five the wind came at W. S. W. with very bad weather. This day our worthy commander Captain Sharp, had very certain intelligence given him, that on Christmas-day, 
A plot against Captain Sharp discovered.  which was, now at hand, the company, or at least a great part thereof, had a design to shoot him; he having appointed that day some time since to be merry. Hereupon he made us share the wine amongst us, as being persuaded they would scarce attempt any such thing in their sobriety. The wine we shared fell out to three jars unto each mess. That night the wind increased.  
December the 8th. The night past was both cloudy and windy; the wind often varying between the N. W. and S. W. points. This morning it varied between W. and N. W. by W. About noon this day, we brought a new mainsail to the yard, but did not set it then, by reason there blowed too much wind. I reckoned a N. E. half N. way, and by the same thirty leagues. By observation made we found Lat. 38 D. 29 S. In the afternoon we had one or two squalls of wind and rain; but the violence of both fell at stern of us. In the evening it blew again very hard. I observed this day, the rising and setting of the Sun, 
The variation.  and found the exact variation to be 12 D. 15 N. E.  
December the 9th. The night was starry-light, but withal, very windy. About the break of day, the wind came to N. W. and at seven we set our fore-top-sail, and stood N. N. E. with not much wind. We made since our last reckoning a N. E. quarter E. way, and twenty nine leagues. We found by observation Lat. 37 D. 30 S. The sea was much fallen, 
Their Vessel is leaky.  but our ship now began to complain of several leaks, through our tedious and long Voyage. This afternoon we hoisted up our main-yard and set up back-stays and main-swifter; whose ring-bolt gave way, but was mended. In the evening of this day we had but little wind.  
December the 10th. The night was very clear, but till ten of the clock this forenoon, we had no wind. Then a small breeze sprang up at N. and N. by E. We made an E N. E. one third N. way, and hereby twenty one leagues. An observation gave us Lat. 37 D. 01 S. In the afternoon of this day our chief Surgeon cut off the foot of a Negro boy, which was perished with cold. 
The foot of a Negro cut off.  Now it was like to be bad weather again. Hereupon we furled our topsails, and lay under a pair of courses. But in the evening we lay under a foresail and mizzen, with misty weather.  
Sunday, December the 11th. All the night past, we had a fresh wind at N. and sometimes at N. N. W. The weather was very cloudy with drizzling rain. We made an E. way, and thereby twenty five leagues. This day brought a great sea. About ten in the morning, one of our main shrouds gave way. In the evening fell some small rain.  
December the 12th. All the night passed we had misty rain, and but little wind; yea, in the morning a perfect calm. At noon came up a small gale at E. S. E. and S. E. bringing with it cloudy weather. We reckoned a N. E. by E. way, and by the same eighteen leagues. Yesterday died the Negro boy whose leg was cut off by our Surgeon, 
Two Negroes die.  as was mentioned the day before. This afternoon also died another Negro, something bigger than the former, named Chepillo. The boy's name was Beafero. All this evening but small wind.  
December the 13th. All night the wind was at E. S. E. our course being N. N. E. At three in the morning it came about at S. S. W. and at nine at E. by N. I reckoned a N. E. by N. way, and fifteen leagues. The weather was hasey. In the afternoon the wind was at N. E. our course being N. N. W. We enjoyed now a very smooth sea, and saw multitudes of Grampusses, Whales, 
Grampusses, Whales, and Porpoises.  and Porpoises, every day as we sailed along.  
December the 14th. The evening past was cloudy, as also the night foggy. Hereupon we took in our topsails. At half an hour after three this morning, we stood N. E. the wind being then at N. N. W. At five we put out our topsails again. At seven of the morning, we saw a Turtle floating upon the sea. We reckoned a N. N. E. way. This days observation afforded us 34 D. 32. S. At this time we had very hot weather, 
Very hot weather.  and great dews in the night. My whole Easting I reckoned to be now, six hundred seventy seven leagues and one third of a league.  
December the 15th. We had a fine night the last past, and a great dew. The wind in the interim was between N. and N. W. I reckoned a N. E. half E. way, and by the same thirty one leagues. We had an observation that gave us Lat. 33 D. 46 S. At noon the wind came about at N. N. W. our course being N. E. We had this day a very clear evening, and at the same time a fresh wind.  
December the 16th. We had a fair night and wind at N. N. W. and N. W. by N. This morning I took the Sun at its rising, 
Variation of the Needle.  and found N. E. variation 20 D. 30. My reckoning was a N. N. E. way, and thirty six leagues and one third of another. By observation I found Lat. 32 D. 09 S. At noon this day the wind came about to N. W.  
December the 17th. Most part of the last night, the wind was at N. W. as before. But towards morning a a fine and easy gale sprang up at W. N. W. This morning we saw several Dolphins playing upon the sea, 
Dolphins seen.  which made us hope they would at last befriend us, and suddenly show us some land or other. We reckoned a N. E. by N. one third N. way, and by the same twenty five leagues. An observation gave us, now Lat. 31 D. 04. A fair evening.  
December the 18th. We had a clear night past, together with a smooth gale at N. W. which this morning was at W. by S. We had now a smooth sea, for several days past. Our reckoning was twenty five leagues, by a N. E. by N. way. By observation we perceive Lat. 29 D. 48 S.  
December the 19th. A clear night the last past, and a fresh breeze at S. S. W. and S. W. by E. lasting until nine in the morning. Then sprang up a wind at S. E. by E. I reckoned this day a N. N. E. half E. way, and upon the same thirty leagues. By observation made, we took Lat. 28 D. 29 S. The day was very fair, and a smooth sea, with weather that was very hot. 
Very hot weather.  My whole Easting I reckoned now to be seven hundred and sixty leagues. This evening I found variation 02 D. 50 N. E.   

CHAP. XXV. The Bucaniers continue their Navigation, without seeing any Land, till they arrive at the Caribby Islands in the West Indies. They give away their Ship to some of their Companions that were poor; and disperse for several Countries. The Author of this Journal arriveth in England.  
DEcember the 20th, 1681. The night before this day was something cloudy, but the weather was fair and the wind but little. At noon the wind came about N. by E. our course being W. N. W. We made a N. N. W. way, and thereby as I reckoned twenty two leagues. By an observation made we took Lat. 27 D. 25 S. The evening of this day was cloudy, and now and then there fell a shower of rain.  
December the 21st. At eight of the clock last night, the wind came N. W. by N. but withal, with such dark weather, that we were forced to take in our topsails. The night was something rainy, and the weather, this morning calm and rainy. About ten we had a small breeze at N. W. We reckoned a N. by E. way, and by the same sixteen leagues. The afternoon of this day was calm and still.  
December the 22d. We had a fair and clear night the last past, which produced this day a smooth sea, and extreme hot weather, and very little wind near the Sun; so that no observation was made. 
Extreme hot weather.   
December the 23d. The night was very fair. At midnight or thereabouts, a fresh gale sprang up at S. E. and E. S. E. which sometime was E. This freshned by degrees. We had in the day very hot and clear weather. By a N. way I reckoned fifteen leagues.  
December the 24. Last night we had both a fresh gale, and a clear night. The wind was at E. by S. We reckoned a N. E. by E. way, and by it thirty one leagues.  
Sunday, December the 25th. This day being Christmas-day, 
Christmas-day.  for celebration of that great festival, we killed yesterday in the evening a sow. This sow we had brought from the Gulf of Nicoya, being then a sucking pig of three weeks old, more or less, but now weighed about fourscore and ten pound. 
The weather extreme hot.  With this hogs-flesh we made our Christmas-dinner, being the only flesh we had eaten ever since we turned away our prizes under the Aequinoctial, and left the Island of Plata. We had this day several flaws of wind, and some rain; but the weather otherwise was pretty clear. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and thirty three leagues by the same. It was now also extreme hot weather, as we signified before.  
December the 26th. We had this day several gusts of wind, which forced us to stand by our topsails. Yet were they but very short, and all the rest of the while we enjoyed an indifferent fresh gale at E. and E. by S. We reckoned a N. by E. way, and twenty eight leagues.  
December the 27th. We had fair weather, and a fresh wind at E. and E. by S. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and upon the same thirty two leagues. The evening of this day was cloudy.  
December the 28. Last night was cloudy with a fresh w●nd. We reckoned a N. E. way, and by the same forty six leagues. We found by an observation made Lat. 15 D. 30 S. My whole Easting I reckoned this day to be eight hundred and twenty five leagues. Now we saw much flying-fish, with some Dolphins, Bonitoes, 
Much fish seen.  and Albicores; but they will not take the hook.  
December the 29th. All last night was cloudy, with a fresh wind between E. and E. S. E. The weather all the afternoon was hasey. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and hereupon forty leagues and one third. In the afternoon we had a S. E. by E. wind, which blew very fresh. The evening was clear. 
Variation.  At Sunset I found variation to N. W. 04 D. 19  
December the 30th. The night past was cloudy. Towards morning the wind came about at E. At six it came E. S. E. and at ten to S. E. by S. We made a N. by E. way, and forty three leagues. By observation we found Lat. 11 D. 03 S. The evening of this day was clear.  
December the 31st. We had a cloudy night the last past, but the morning was hasey. We came now, to a strict allowance of only three good pints of water each day. We made a N. by E. way, and found Lat. by observation 08 D. 55 S. In the afternoon we had an E. S. E. and S. E. by E. wind. My whole Easting I reckoned now to be eight hundred eighty four leagues and one third. At noon we stood away N. W.  
Sunday, January the first 1681. All the night past was cloudy, as this day also with some showers of rain. We made a N. W. one eight N. way, and forty leagues. In the afternoon came about a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E.  
January the 2d. The weather this day was both dull and cloudy. We reckoned a N. W. one quarter N. way, and by the same thirty two leagues. By observation we found, that our Lat. now was 06 D. 06 S. The wind came pretty fresh at S. E.  
January the 3d. We had several squalls of wind, and some rain. But, withal a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E. Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and thirty four leagues. The afternoon was clear, but the evening cloudy.  
January the 4th. All the night past was very cloudy; but this forenoon it cleared up. Yesterday we put abroad our main-top-sail, studden-sails; but took them in at night. At four this morning we set our larboard studden-sail, and before noon fitted up top-gallant masts, and yard. We made a N. W. way, and by it forty leagues and two thirds. By observation we had now Lat. 03 D. 09 S. This afternoon also, we set our top-gallant-sail, being forced to make out all its running rigging. The wind was pretty fresh at S. E. and S. E. by E.  
January the 5th. Most part of the night past was clear, and starlight, though with some rain towards the morning. This being come, we put out our top-gallant-sail, and both our topsail, studden-sails. At noon likewise, we put up our fore-top-gallant masts, and yard. We caught an Albicore, 
A 〈◊〉 Albicore taken.  this day, weighing about one hundred and twenty pound weight. The wind was at S. E. by S. and S. S. E. We made a N. W. way, and reckoned thereby thirty five leagues. By observation we found Lat. 02 D. 03 S. We had now mighty hot weather.  
January the 6th. Yesterday in the evening we caught another Albicore which weighed only eight or nine pound weight. 
〈◊〉 small one.  We made a N. W. way, and reckoned thirty five leagues, as before. Now by an observation made, we could perceive only Lat. 00 D. 49 S. The evening of this day was very clear.  
January the 7th. The wind was variable between S. S. E. and S. S. W. though not altogether so fresh as before. Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and thirty six leagues by the same. This day an observation gave us Lat. 00 D. 32 N. of the Aequinoctial, 
〈…〉 the Aequinoctial.  which now we had passed again. In the afternoon of this day we caught another Albicore which weighed more than the first we took; 
An Albicore of ●3●  that is, between one hundred thirty five, and one hundred and forty pound. But little wind stirring this afternoon.  
January the 8th. This evening last passed, we had little better than a calm. At nine this morning, we had a fresh wind at S. S. E. with dark weather, so that we thought it convenient, to take in our main-top-sail. But, at noon we set it again, and also, our larboard top-studden-sail with both top-gallant sails. We made a N. W. way, and by it thirty four leagues. By an observation made we found Lat. 01 D. 55 N. We had now extreme hot weather, and a very small allowance of water.  
January the 9th. Last night we took in topsails all night, the wind then whiffling between S. and W. points. We had notwithstanding, for the most part very little wind. The morning of this day was rainy, and thereupon, with good diligence, we saved a bompkin of water. There was now a great rippling sea, rising very high; and it is reported, that sometimes and somewhere hereabouts, is to be seen an enchanted Island; which others say, and dare assert, 
An enchanted Island.  that they have sailed over. I reckoned a N. W. by N. one quarter N. way, and twenty five leagues. This afternoon we had very dark and calm weather, looking, as if we should have much rain. Now, reckoning up my meridian I found myself E. from my departure, seven hundred and two leagues. In the evening we had very rainy weather and a cockling sea.  
January the 10th. All the night past was cloudy. About midnight sprang up a small breeze varying all round the compass. At five this morning we had a breeze at S. E. and a very clear sky, which afterwards continued to freshen, with the same clearness as before. We made a N. W. by N. one quarter N. way, and by the same two leagues and two thirds. By a clear observation we had now Lat. 03 D. 16 N. At four this evening the wind was at E. S. E. the weather being violent hot; in so much, that our allowance of water was tedious unto us for its shortness. At the same time we had an indifferent smooth sea from the E.  
January the 11th. All the night passed we had little or no wind. But about two in the morning, the wind freshned again at E. N. E. and brought both a clear and hot day. We made twenty three leagues by a N. W. one quarter W. way. This days observation gave us Lat. 04 D. 06. N. In the afternoon we had a shower of rain; and afterward a fresh wind at E. N. E. But the evening grew dull.  
January the 12th. In the night passed we had two or three squalls of wind, and some showers of rain. In the mean while the wind blew fresh at N. E. and N. E. by E. as it also continued to do in the day. I reckoned a N. W. way, and forty four leagues and one third. Our observation this day gave us 05 D. 49 N. Yesterday and to day we set our main-top-sail. Now I could not find much variation of the needle. 
Little 〈◊〉 no variation.   
January the 13th. We had a fresh gale all the last night, but more Northerly than before; for now it was N. E. by N. We reckoned a W. N. W. way, and thereupon— leagues and two thirds. An observation taken showed us Lat. 06 D. 41 N. We had a N. N. E. sea and very clear weather.  
January the 14th. We had a clear night the last, and a fresh wind at E. N. E. We made a N. W. one fifth W. way, and thirty eight leagues. By observation we found Lat. 07 D. 46 N. We had a smooth sea; and now we were come to only three horns of water a day, which made in all but a quart allowance for each man. The evening was clear, 
Their allowance shortened.  and we had a fresh wind.  
Sunday, January the 15th. The night past was clear, and the wind fresh at E.N.E. and again at N.E. by E. very fresh. About eleven of the clock at night, died one of our companions, 
One of their men dyeth.  named William Stephens. It was commonly believed that he poisoned himself with Manzanilla in Golfo dulce, for he never had been in health since that time. This forenoon was cloudy. We reckoned forty four leagues and a N. W. way. An observation gave us this day 09 D. 18 N. All the last night we kept out our top-gallant-sail●. We saw hereabouts, many flying-fish being very large in size. This morning also, we threw over board our dead man, and gave him two French volly's and one English one. I found now again very small variation.  
January the 16th. We had a clear night, and a very fresh wind at N. E. and E. N. E. with a long homeing sea. My reckoning was a N. W. one seventh W. way, and thereby forty eight leagues and one third. The observation made this day gave us Lat. 10 D. 48 N. I reckoned myself now, East from my departure five hundred fifty three leagues. We had a cloudy evening.  
January the 17th. All the night passed we enjoyed a fresh wind, and so this day also, at N. E. by N. We made a N. W. half W. way, and thereupon forty seven leagues and one third of a league. By observation we found Lat. 12 D. 19 N. We had now a long North sea. At noon this day we steered away N. N. W. The day was very hot, but the night both cool and dewy.  
January the 18th. All the night past was both cloudy and windy. At six this morning our sprit-sail-top-mast broke. I reckoned a W. N. W. way, and forty eight leagues by the same. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 12 N. At noon we steered away W. the wind being at N. E. fresh, with a clear evening.  
January the 19th. We had a clear night the last, and a fresh wind at E. N. E. which sometimes came in bushes. Our reckoning was a W. half Southerly way, and by the same forty six leagues. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 01 N. Yesterday in the evening we put up a new sprit-sail-top-mast; with a fine smooth gale at N. E. by E.  
January the 20th. The night past was clear, and not very fresh; but at daybreak it freshened again. Last night we saw a great shoal of fish; whereof we caught none, by reason the Porpoises frightened them from us, as they ofttimes had done before. Yesterday in the evening also, we saw a Man of War-Fowl, 
A Man of War-Fowl.  and that gave us good hopes we should ere long see land. These hopes, and the great desires we had to end our voyage; gave us occasion this day to put in, or stake down, each man of our company a piece of eight for a reward unto him, 
A reward to him that first ●●th land.  that should first discover land. We reckoned a W. one sixth Northerly way, and by it thirty eight leagues. An observation gave us this day Lat. 13 D. 11 N. The wind was at N. E. and E. N. E. This day we passed over many riplings, and also saw many multitudes of fish; 
Porpoises hinder their fishing.  but the Porpoises did always hinder us of having any good of them.  
On January the 21st. We made a W. way, and reckoned forty seven leagues. By observation we found Lat. 13 D. 07 N. The wind was at E. N. E. and from thence came a long sea. The evening was very clear.  
January the 22d. We had a fair and a clear day, the wind being at E. We reckoned a W. by N. one third W. way, and forty leagues. An observation shown us Lat. 13 D. 17 N. We had a clear evening, and a fresh wind at E. N. E.  
January the 23d. This day was both clear and hot, with a fresh wind at E. N. E. My reckoning was a W. way, and forty six leagues. Our observation made this day afforded us Lat. 13 D. 15 N. In the evening we had some rain.  
January the 24th. This day brought us likewise clear weather, such as the day before. I reckoned a W. way, and forty leagues and one third. By observation we found Lat. 13 D. 12. N. The afternoon was cloudy, and had some rain, the wind freshning at E.N.E. and at E. by N. I reckoned now, that I was East from my departure three hundred and eleven leagues. We had a cloudy evening.  
January the 25th. Both last night and this morning the weather was cloudy. This morning we saw several Tropick-birds of divers sorts. 
Tropick-birds seen.  Our reckoning was a W. three quarters N. way, and forty three leagues. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 29 N. This afternoon we saw a Booby flying close aboard the Horizon. 
A Booby seen.  The weather was hasey. 
They look out sharp for land.  But now we began to look out sharp on all sides for land, expecting to see it every minute. I reckoned myself to be Eastward of my departure two hundred sixty eight leagues.  
January the 26th. The night last passed was indifferent clear. Yet notwithstanding, this morning we had a smart shower of rain, and it was very windy. Hereupon we furled our spirit sail, the weather being very hasey to the Westward. We reckoned a W. way, and thereby forty six leagues and one third. By observation taken we found Lat. 13 D. 17. N. At noon this day, we had a very fierce Tornado, and rain together; but withal, a clear afternoon. We had a high E N. E. sea; 
A fierce T●●nado.  and saw multitudes of flying-fish, also several fowls, and amongst these, two or three Boobies. The evening was hasey.  
January the 27th. All night passed we had a fresh wind, and clear weather. This morning our fore-top-mast back-stay gave way, and at daybreak, the star-board-sheet of our fore-top-sail broke. We had several Tornadoes this day, and dark weather. Our reckoning was a W. way, and forty eight leagues by the same. We had a clear evening, and a dark night. This day also a certain bird, called a Noddy, came on board us, 
A Noddy cometh aboard.  which we took for a certain token that we were not, now very far from land.  
Saturday, January the 28th. We had a very clear night the last past. About an hour before day one of our company happened to descry land, 
They descry the Island of Barbados.  which proved to be the Island of Barbados, at S. S. W. from us, and at two leagues and an half distance, more or less. Hereupon we clapped on a wind, N. and by W. At daybreak we were only four leagues distant from Chalky-Mount, at which time we stood S. W. by S. As we sailed we saw several ships at anchor in Spikes-Road. Soon after a Shalop passed by, between us and the shore, but would not come within call of us. Hereupon we stood in, within a mile of the shore; and made a wiff unto a Pinnace which we saw coming out of the road aforementioned. She came close aboard us, and as it should seem, was the Barge of one of his Majesty's Frigates, 
They are afraid of the Richmond- Frigate.  the Richmond then lying at the Bridge-town at anchor. They told us of a peace at home, but would not come on board us, though often invited thereunto. Neither dared we be so bold, as to put in there at Barbados; for hearing of a Frigate lying there, we feared least the said Frigate should seize us for Privateers, and for having acted in all our voyage without Commission. Thus we stood away from thence for the Island of Antego. 
〈◊〉 bear away 〈◊〉 Antego.   
Here I cannot easily express the infinite joy we were possessed withal, this day to see our own countrymen again. They told us that a ship, which we saw in the offing to leeward of the Island, was a Bristol-man, and an Interloper; but, we feared that same vessel, to be the Frigate aforementioned. I reckoned a way of twenty five leagues. So that I was now by my account, to Eastward of my departure one hundred fifty one leagues. Now we stood N. by W. and by observation found Lat. 13 D. 17 N. we being then N. W. from the body of the Island of Barbados, between seven and eight leagues. This afternoon we freed the Negro who was our shoemaker by his trade, 
They give liberty to a Negro.  giving him his liberty for the good service he had done us in all the course of this voyage. We gave also unto our good commander Captain Sharp, a Mulato boy, as a free gift of the whole company, for to wait upon him, in token of the respects we all were owing unto him, for the safety of our conduct through so many dangerous adventures. This being done, we shared some small parcels of money, that had not as yet been touched of our former prizes; 
The last dividend ma●●.  and this dividend amounted unto twenty four pieces of eight each man.  
At one of the clock this day, from our fore-yard we descried the Island of Santa Lucia, 
 being one of the Western Islands, not far distant from that of Barbados. I had omitted to tell a passage which happened in our ship, on Thursday last, which was the 26th day of this Month, and just two days before we made the Island aforementioned of Barbados. On that day therefore a little Spanish shock-Dog, 
 which we had found in our last Wine-prize, taken under the Aequinoctial, and had kept alive till now, was sold at the mast by public cry, for forty pieces of eight, his owner saying that all he could get for him should be spent upon the company at a public merriment. Our commander Captain Sharp bought the Dog, with intention to eat him, in case we did not see land very soon. This money therefore, with one hundred pieces of eight more, which our Boatswain, Carpinter and Quartermaster had refused to take at this last dividend, for some quarrel they had against the sharers thereof; was all laid up in store till we came to land, to the intent of spending it ashore, at a common feast, or drinking bout. At Sunset the Island of Santa Lucia bore W. S. W. from us, and was at ten leagues distance. 
Isle of Martnica.  Also the Island of Martinica bore N. W. by W. of us at twelve or thirteen leagues distance. We had this day a very clear evening.  
Sunday, January the 29th. We had a clear night and a fresh wind at E. by N. and E.N.E. Our reckoning was a N. N. W. half W. way, and hereby forty six leagues. By observation we took Lat. 15 D. 46 N. At noon this day we saw the Island named la Desseada, 
la Desseada.  or the Desired Island, which then bore N. W. from us, and seemed to be at eight leagues distance more or less. At six of the clock in the evening, we saw likewise Marigalanta, 
Marigalanta.  another of the Cariby Islands, at S. W. by W. from us, and that of Guadalupe, streaking itself in several hammocks of land, 
Guadalupe▪  both Westward and Northward: as also la Desseada abovementioned at S. E. which from thence showeth like table-land, and at each end hath a low point running out. At six this evening it was W. S. W. and at five or six leagues distance from us. At the same time we saw the Island of Monserrate, at a great distance from our ship; 
Monserrate▪  and making three round hammocks close together. This evening likewise, we caught an Albicore of twenty pound weight.  
Monday, January the 30th. We had a fair night all the last past, and a fresh wind. Hereupon, all night we halled up our mainsail in brails, standing at the same time N. by W. with th● wind at E. N. E. At midnight we stood N. W. At three in the morning we lay by until five. Then we stood away W. N. W. until six; and at that hour we stood W. At eight of the clock we saw the Island of la Antigua, 
〈◊〉 Antigua.  called by us Antego, to the Southward of us, making three round hammocks of land, and a long high hill to Northw●●d. Hereupon, we stood W. S. W. for it. At noon we found Lat. 17 D. N. the Island being then just W. from us.  
We came about to th● S. of the Island, and sent a Canoa on shore, for to get Tobacco, and other necessaries that we wanted; as also to ask leave of the Governor to come into the Port. The Gentry of the place and common people, were very willing and desirous to receive us. But on Wednesday, February the first, the Governor flatly denied us entry; at which all the Gentry were much grieved, and shown themselves very kind unto us. Hereupon we agreed among ourselves, 
They give away the ship.  to give away, and leave the ship unto them of our company, who had no money left them of all their purchase in this Voyage, having lost it all at play; 
And disperse.  and then to divide ourselves into two Ships, which were now bound for England. Thus I myself, and thirteen more of our company, went on board Captain Robert Porteen his ship, called the Lisbon Merchant, and set sail from la Antigua on February the eleventh, and landed at Dartmouth in England, March the 26th, Anno 1682.   
FINIS.   

THE TABLE To the Second Volume OF THE BUCANIERS  


A.  
ALbicores, a sort of fish so called by the Spaniards, 47, 203. An huge one taken, 204. Another taken of one hundred and thirty five pound weight, ibid.  
Alexander (John) one of the Bucaniers, and a Scotchman, drowned at the Gulf of Nicoya, 145  
Captain Alleston, a Commmander among the Bucaniers: his Forces, p. 2. He is left to guard the ships, 4  
Captain Alonso, a Spanish Officer, killed by the Bucaniers, 164  
Ahorcadoes, two rocks so called, nigh the Island of Solango, 167  
Anchova's, huge shoals of them, 103  
Captain Andraeas, a chief Commander among the Indians: he conducteth the Bucaniers to the Golden Island, 3. He embarketh with them for Santa Maria, 8. He returneth home with the King of Darien from Panama, 35  
Captain Antonio, a man of great parts, and a chief Commander among the Indians of Darien, 5. He joineth the Bucaniers, and persuadeth them to undertake the Journey of Santa Maria, ibid. He returneth home from before Panama. 35  
Antigua, alias Antego, one of the Caribe Islands, 212. It's Governor denieth entry to the Bucaniers, ibid.  
Argandona (Don Tomas) Commander of a Spanish Vessel, taken before Guayaquil, 81. He is set at liberty, 109  
Arequipa, an English Gentleman inhabitant thereof, and married there, fought the Bucaniers at Hilo, 143  
Arica, designed upon by the Bucaniers, 53. Being arrived there, they dare not to land, 93. is designed upon the second time, 126. its Governor is Proprietor of Yqueque, 129. The Town assaulted and taken, but the Fort standeth out, 130, etc. A description of its Coast, and situation, 136. Some account of the place, 135  
Alligators, their bigness and nature, 43  
Armadilla of Panama destroyed by the Bucaniers, 27. Description of that bloody fight, ibid. etc. Three Armadilla-barks sent to keep the mouth of the River of Santa Maria, for fear of the Bucaniers. 145  
Captain Assientoes his brother killed by the Bucaniers, 164    


B.  
Don Baltazar, a Gentleman of Quality, taken in a Vessel before Guayaquil, 82. He is set at liberty, 109  
Barahona (Don Jacinto) Admiral of the Armadilla of Panama, 28. He is killed in the engagement, 30  
Barbadas Island descried by the Bucaniers, being the first land they saw, 209  
Barbacoa, a part of the Continent of America, in the South Sea, 49  
Barcos de la Armadilla, 27. Two of them taken by the Bucaniers, ibid. etc.  
Barco de aviso, or a Packet-boat, taken by the Bucaniers, 161  
Barklogs, 70. Their use, 78  
Beafero, or rather Viviero, a Negr●-boy, whose leg was cut off at Sea, dyeth, 199  
Boca del Toro, the place of the general rendezvous of the Bucaniers, 1  
Bonitoes, a sort of fish so called, 47. many caught, 141, 142 seen, 203.  
Booby, a bird so called seen at Sea, being a token of land nigh at hand, 208  
Captain Bournano, a French Commander; his forces; his attempts on a place called Chepo: he tampereth with the Indians of Darien, 2. He leaveth the Bucaniers, and why, 3  
Bucaniers, they land on Darien, being in all three hundred and thirty one men: their march towards Santa Maria, 4. Their Arms and provisions, ibid. Four of their number tyre, and return to the ships, 5. Difficulties of this march, ibid. etc. They are jealous of the Indians, yet without cause, 9 They take the Town and Fort of Santa Maria, 10. They find little purchase there, the Gold being conveyed away, ibid. They resolve to go for Panama, 12. Are deserted by the Indians, excepting the chief Commanders of them. Are encouraged by a Spaniard, who promiseth to guide them safely, ibid. They take two Barks by the way, 24. Item, several prisoners (whom they kill in cold blood) as also a Peragua at Chepillo, 25, 26. They engage the Armadilla of Panama, and destroy it by a fierce and bloody fight, 27, etc. They block up Panama by Sea, and take several Vessels before the Town, 31. They go to the Isle of Tavoga, where they take other prizes, 36. Thence to Otoque, and Cayboa, 38, 39 They are repulsed from Puebla Nueba, 41. They take here one Vessel, and destroy two more, 42. Are deserted by many of their company, 43. They careen at Gorgona, and alter their Vessel, 49, etc. They lose a ship of their company, and find her again, 55, 62. They design to plunder Arica, 54. Eight of their company lost at the Isle of Gallo, 75. They take a prize off of Guayaquil, 72. Their cruelty towards a Spanish Friar, 75. They arrive at Arica, but dare not land▪ 92. Hence they bore away for Hilo: take the place: plunder and destroy a Sugar-work: are cheated by the Spaniards; and at last forced to retire with little or no pillage, etc. They arrive at Coquimbo: take the City of la Serena; plunder it, and are forced again to retire without any considerable purchase, 104, etc. Multitudes of dangers they were in at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116, etc. They mutiny among themselves, and choose a new Commander, 120. They outbrave three Spanish men of war, and give them the go-by, 122. Their cruelty towards an old man at Yqueque, 128. They attempt Arica the second time, 126. Are beaten out of the Town, yet make a bold retreat, 132, etc. They resolve to go home over-land, 137. They land at Guasco, 139. They surprise Hilo the second time, 142. They mutiny again among themselves, 140. They go to the Gulf of Nicoya, where they take down the decks of their ship, and hereby mend its sailing, 140, etc. Forty seven of their Companions leave them, and go home over-land, 141. They take some prisoners and two Barks at the Gulf of Nicoya, 144. They careen at Golfo Dulce and resolve to go and cruize under the Aequinoctial, 150, 156. They take there several prizes, 158, etc. especially one very rich, 162. They are in danger of being massacred by their own slaves, 165. They attempt the surprisal of Paita, but in vain, 168, etc. They stand away for the straits of Magallanes, 170. They arrive at a place incognito, which they call the Duke of Yorks Islands, and are in great danger of being lost at their arrival, 178. They run many other dangers in the said place by stress of weather, ibid. etc. Some of them resolve to shoot Captain Sharp on Christmas-day, 198. They arrive at Barbadas, but dare not put in there for fear of the Richmond-Frigat, 209. They bore away for Antego, and arrive at the said Island, 212. They give away their ship to the poorest of their company, and disperse for several places, 212. Some of them arrive in England, ibid.  
Mr. Bull, one of the Bucaniers, killed, 25  
Mr. Bullock, one of the Bucaniers, and a Surgeon, made prisoner at Arica, and detained there by the Spaniards, 163    


C.  
Cabbage-trees, 122  
Cacao-nut, whereof Chocolate is made, the best sort, 71. Cacao-trees in great plenty at the Isle of Canon, 142  
Caldero, a Port of this name in the Gulf of Nicoya, 143  
Calms, very great, and where, 68  
Camarones', a river of this name nigh Yqueque, 130  
Cammock (William), one of the Bucaniers, dyeth 113  
Cannis, a Dutchman, Interpreter to the Bucaniers, 95. He runneth away to the Enemy, 147  
Canoas', none about Guayaquil, 70  
Canon, an Island of this name: its latitude and appearance at Sea, 143. Some account thereof, 142  
Cape of San Francisco, 58, 160  
Cape Passao, 51, 161, 164  
Cape St. Laurence, 61  
Cape Blanco, 77, 149. New Cape Blanco, a place so called, 147  
Carabaxal (Don Diego) one of the Commanders of the Spanish Armadilla, 28. He escapeth from the fight, 29  
Carpenters (Spanish) do the Bucaniers good service at the Gulf of Nicoya, and are rewarded by them, 146  
Cavallo, a place so called in the Gulf of Nicoya. 145  
Cayboa, an Island famous for the fishery of Pearl, 39 its situation, ibid. Some account thereof, 43  
Chandy, or Chanduy, a Point so called, 71, 167  
Chapel (James) one of the Bucaniers, with whom the Author fought a Duel, at the Isle of Plate, 165  
Santa Clara, a place so named, where a rich Vessel was cast away, 167  
Chepillo, an Island nigh Panama, where the Bucaniers meet, 25. They take there several prisoners, and a Peragua, 25, 26  
Chira, an Island of this name, in the Gulf of Nicoya, 144, 146  
Chocolate, much used by the Bucaniers, 100  
Christmas-day solemnised by the Bucaniers, 116, 202  
Don Christoval, a person of Quality, taken before Guayaquil, 82. He is set at liberty, 109  
Comet, one seen and observed, with what followed, 101  
Coasts very deep, 55  
Colan, a Town of this name, its description, 170, 171  
Cold, in extremity, whereabouts the Bucaniers experimented it. 193  
Cockles as large as two fists, 146. like unto those in England, 192  
Captain Cook, a Commander among the Bucaniers: his Forces, 2. What party he led at their first landing, 4. He is put into a Vessel taken at Puebla Nueba; but soon quitteth that Command, 44. is put into irons, and wherefore, 121  
Cook (William) servant unto Captain Cook, dieth, 137. He accuseth his Master of several Crimes, ibid.  
Copper-furnaces and Mines, 138  
Coquimbo-Bay, 103. its description and topography, 111  
Coves, or Cuevas, what they are, 2  
Cox (Captain John) one of the Bucaniers, is put into a Vessel taken at Puebla Nueba, 44. His Vessel is sunk by order, 76. He is sent to parley with the Enemy at Hilo, 95  
Cox's River, 188  
Captain Coxon setteth forth towards Darien, 1. His forces, 2. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He is chosen to be chief Commander of the Bucaniers, 12. He engageth a Spanish Bark, but misseth of his design, 25. is branded with cowardice, 35. He mutineth, and returneth home, with many more over-land, ibid.    


D.  
Darien, a Province of America, whose Indian King meeteth the Bucaniers: his habit and attire: as also the of Queen, 6▪ 7. The women free, airy, and brisk, ibid. The Indians of this Country can tell no farther than twenty, 8. They wage almost continual Wars against the Spaniards, 2. Whereabouts is the place of their general rendezvous in the said Wars, 9 The King's Daughter redeemed by the English at Santa Maria, 12. Cruelty of the Indians against the Spaniards, ibid. They desert the Bucaniers, ibid. Are forced to a Peace with the Spaniards by a Stratagem contrived in the Name of the English, 153  
Drake (Sir Francis) some memoirs of him, 63. He divided the Plate by whole bowls unto his Company, and threw much overboard, idid. He built a Church at the River Loa in the South Sea, 142  
Desseada, one of the Caribe-Islands, 211  
Dog, one sold by the Bucaniers at the mast for forty pieces of eight, 210  
Dolphins caught, 141. Seen at Sea with hopes of land, 200, 203  
Duke of Yorks Islands, so called by the Bucaniers: an account of them as far as they were searched, 178. etc. Their draught 186    


E.  
Earthquake, which happened at the City of la Serena, while the Bucaniers were there, 108  
Eclipse of the Sun observed, 84. What followed, ibid.  
Embargo laid on all Spanish Vessels in the South Sea, for fear of the Bucaniers, 76. it is taken off, 129  
Enchanted Island, 205  
English Gulf, a place so named by the Bucaniers, its draught, 188    


F.  
Farol, or Farollon, de Glantanoes, an Island so called nigh Panama, 24. The Bucaniers arrive there, and seize the watchman of the Isle, ibid.  
Fowls very great seen at Sea, and where, 102. seen again, 114. A strange Seafowl like an Eagle, 180  
Francisco, a Negro, attempteth to make his escape, 154. He is detained prisoner for this attempt, 159  
Francisco, an Indian, attempteth the same, ibid.  
Francisco, a Biscayner, and a Pilot of the South Sea, 163    


G.  
Galapagos, an Island of the South Sea, where the Bucaniers designed to careen, 48. Great currents and calms thereabouts, 64  
Gallo, an Island nigh Gorgona, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 56  
Grampusses, 53, 61, 199  
Guayaquil, designed upon by Sawkins; also by Captain Sharp, 45. They change this resolution, 53. An account of the said place, 71  
Goat-key, a place so called, 74  
Goats in huge quantity at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116  
Gold, whereabouts gathered in great quantity, 11, 50, 53, 127  
Golden Island, whereabouts situated: the Bucaniers meet at the said place, 4  
Golfo Dulce, a draught thereof, 155. it is named King Charles his Harbour, by Captain Sharp, 154  
Gorgona Island, its latitude, situation, appearance at Sea, and description, 50, 51, etc. it's continual rains, 49  
Gorgonilla, another Island, 56  
Gulf of San Miguel, 4, 15, 16. its smoothness of water, 18  
Gulf of Ballona, 14. its description, 20. How it lieth in relation to the Bay of Panama, 40  
Gulf of Nicoya, its description, 148. The Bucaniers arrive there, and search it, 143. They take there some prisoners and two barks, 144  
Gulf of the English, or English Gulf, its draught and description, 188  
Guadalupe, one of the Caribe-Islands, its appearance at Sea, 211  
Guasco its Point, 138. An account of this place, 139. Description of its Port, 144  
Guyones, a Cape so named, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 150    


H.  
Captain Harris, a chief Commander among the Bucaniers, 2. What party he led at their first landing upon Darien, 4. He taketh a Spanish Bark, 25. is killed in the engagement before Panama, 32  
Hilo, its Port and Point, 94, 91, 92. The Town taken, 94. The Sugar-work burnt, 97. The inhabitants force the Bucaniers to retreat, ibid. What they got there, 98. The place surprised and taken again, 142  
Hernando, a Negro of this name, runneth away from the Bucaniers, 154  
Houses of Darien, how they are built, even neater than those at Jamaica, 6    


I.  
Juan Fernandez, an Island of this name, its appearance at Sea, description, and some account thereof, 115, etc. A particular observation made there by the Author and others, ibid.,  
Juan Diaz, a River so called nigh Arica, 136  
Captain Juan, a Spanish Commander, promiseth to conduct the Bucaniers to Guayaquil, 45. He is set at liberty, 109  
Joseph Gabriel, a Spaniard, dieth, 53. He promiseth to deliver Panama into the hands of the Bucaniers, ibid.  
Islands of Ice, 192  
Island enchanted, 205    


K.  
King of Darien goeth with the Bucaniers to take Panama, 13. He promiseth 50000 men to assist the English, ibid. He returneth home from Panama, 35  
King Golden-cap, Son unto the King of Darien, 13. He goeth with the Bucaniers on the expedition of Panama, ibid. He remaineth behind after his Father was returned home, 35  
King Charle's his Harbour 154  
King Charles the first of England assisted by the Merchants of Lima, 63    


L.  
Land of San Tiago, 57  
Land of San Matteo, 57  
Land-fowls, 88 seen at Sea, yet no land, 193, 194  
Land seen, but not found, about the Latitude of 57, D. South, 191  
Leaves of a certain nature, eaten by the Inhabitants of Yqueque, 128  
Lapina, the Embarcadero of Guayaquil, 71  
Lima, its Merchants send a ship laden with Plate unto the King of England, 63. its Table used by the Author, 101. Whereabouts the ship was lost, 167  
Limpets in strange quantities at the Duke of Yorks Islands, 180, etc. Limpet point, 188  
Loa, a River so called, 142. The Bucaniers could not find it, ibid. A Church built there by Sir Francis Drake, ibid.  
Lobos, an Island so called, or the Isle of Seals, 140, 169  
Lopez (Don Diego) Commander of el Santo Rosario, being a rich prize taken under the Aequinoctial, 163. is killed in the fight, ibid.  
Santa Lucia, an Isle of this name, being one of the Western Islands, 210  
Lions adore the Cross at Tumbez, 76  
Lion of the Sea, or a Sea-Lyon, its description, and where seen by the Author, 110    


M.  
Captain Mackett, a Commander among the Bucaniers; his forces, 2. He is left to guard the ships, 4  
Magallan-Clouds, very famous among the Bucaniers, 85  
Man-of-war-fowl, a Seafowl so called in the West-India's 207  
Manta, a Port and Town so called, 60, 61, 165  
Manzanilla-tree, the effects of the drops falling from off the leaves, 44. One of the Bucaniers poisoned therewith, 206  
Santa Maria, a Town so called, with a Garrison: is designed upon by the Bucaniers: its situation, 4. is taken and burnt, 10, 14  
Santa Martha, a Spanish Town taken by Captain Sawkins, 38. The Bishop thereof made Bishop of Panama.  
Marigalanta, one of the Caribe-Islands, 211  
Martinica-Island, another of the Western Isles. ibid.  
San Matteo its Bay, 158. Land of San Matteo, 57  
Mero, a Point of land of this name, 168  
Mexillones, a Bay so called, 142  
Mines of Silver very rich. 127  
San Miguel, the Gulf. ibid.  
Miscelaw, how it is prepared, 7, 8  
Monte de Christo, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 61  
Montgomery (Robert) one of the Bucaniers, dieth, 82  
Monserrate, one of the Caribe-Islands, its appearance at Sea, 211  
Mora de Sama, 91, 92  
Moro de Horse, its appearance at Sea, 141  
Morro Moreno, its appearance at Sea, ibid.  
Mulato-boy, one given by the Bucaniers unto Captain Sharp for to wait on him, 210  
Mules flesh eaten by the Bucaniers at Hilo, 99  
Mussels in great quantities found at the Duke of Torks Islands, 180. Huge ones, 183. Those Indians open them more readily with their fingers, than we with knives, ibid.  
Mussel Point, 188    


N.  
Negroes, two of them make their escape, 154. More attempt it, but are taken, ibid.  
Negro, a Shoemaker to the Bucaniers, set at liberty for his good service, 210  
Needle, its variation observed by the Author, at several places and times. 189, 192, 194, 198, 200, 203, 206  
Nicoya, the Gulf.  
Night, whereabouts the Bucaniers found none, 192  
Noddy, a bird of this name seen at Sea, with hopes of seeing land, 209    


O.  
Observation made by the Author, concerning the Navigation about the latitude of 52 D. S. where the Needle varieth very much, 194  
Orson, a name so given to an Indian boy taken in the English Gulf, 185  
Oysters very large and great at Cayboa, 44  
Otoque, an Island of the Bay of Panama, 38, 40    


P.  
Paita, 77, 78. The Bucaniers design upon the said place, 168. Description of its Bay and situation, 191  
Panama taken by Sir Henry Morgan, 1. Designed upon anew, 3. The Bucaniers arrive there, and block it up by Sea, 27, etc. Description of the present state thereof, 33. It hath been burnt three times within this few years, ibid. its Bay described, 40  
Pardela, a bird of this name, 117  
Paxaros, an Island so called; its appearance at Sea, 112  
Paxaros Ninos, a Seafowl so called by the Spaniards; its description, 190, 195  
Plate Island, or Isle of Plate, 55, 62, 140, 165, 167  
San Pedro, a Ship of this name, twice taken by the Bucaniers in the space of fourteen months, 158  
Pena Horadada, a high and steep rock of this name near Paita, 169  
Penguin, a Seafowl so called, 181. Some account of them, 183  
Penguin-shoal, 188  
Precedent of Panama, sendeth a message to the Bucaniers, 38. Their answer, ibid.  
Peter, an Indian boy, runneth away from the Bucaniers, 146  
Peralta (Don Francisco) a valiant Spanish Commander, 28. His undaunted Courage in the engagement before Panama, 30. He highly commendeth the valour of the English, 32. He dissuadeth the Bucaniers from attempting the ships at Perico, 31. He giveth an account of the present state of Panama, 33. is removed from the Admiral, on board the ship of Mr. Cox, 45. He directeth the Bucaniers to the Island of Gorgona, 49. He admireth the sailings of the English, 64. is taken frantic, but recovereth, 103. He is set at liberty. 109  
Perico, an Island before Panama, where the Bucaniers take veral Vessels, 27, etc.  
Philippinas Islands, how the Spaniards sail unto them, 47  
Pilots of the Spanish Nation, their ignorance, 63  
Piura, an inland City, unto which Paita serveth as a Port or Embarcadero, 169  
Point St. Helen, 69, 167  
Point Chandy, or Chanduy, 71, 167  
Point Parina, 77, 78  
Point of Mangroves, 57 its draught and description, 65  
Punta de Mero, 168  
Punta de Hilo, 89, 90  
Punta Borrica, its latitude and appearance, 151  
Punta Mula, a Point so called in Golfo Dulce, 151, 155  
Punta de San Lorenzo, 17. Under it is a great rippling, 21  
Puebla Nueba, a Town on the Continent, where Captain Sawkins was killed, 41  
Puerto Velo taken the second time, 1  
Porpus, a white one seen, 147. Young Porpoises, 196, 199. They hinder the fishing of the Bucaniers, 208  
Prisoners released by the Bucaniers, 81. Others detained, ibid. 109    


Q.  
Quicara, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 46  
Quito, a great City, unto which Guayaquil serveth for an Embarcadero, 71    


R.  
Rains very continual, and almost incessant, at Gorgona, 49  
Reflection of the white sand very great at Hilo, 99  
Richmond-Frigat hindereth the Bucaniers from landing at the Isle of Barbadas, 209  
Mr. Ringrose the Author embarketh on the River of Santa Maria, 8. His misfortune going to Panama, 14, etc. He is cast away, 17. He saveth the lives of six Spaniards, 19 is made prisoner by the same, but released for his generosity, 21, 22. He overtaketh the rest of the fleet, 23. He putteth to flight one of the Vessels of the Armadi●la, 29. He resolveth to stay, and not go home over-land with the desertors, 43. He repenteth of this resolution, and wherefore, 49. He maketh Quadrants at Sea, 68, 176. He is sent down with a party of men from the City of la Se●●a to the Bay of Coquimbo, 60. and returneth, 108. is sent with a flag of truce to the enemy at Hilo, 95. His advice is not followed, to the prejudice of that enterprise, 96. is in great danger of being cast away in the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 117. is strucken blind by a strange accident, but recovereth again, 153. He fighteth a Duel at the Isle of Plate, 165. He arriveth in England, 212  
Rio de Juan Diaz, a River of this name, 92  
Rockweed seen at Sea, yet no land, 195  
Rosario, or el Santo Rosario, the name of a great Prize taken under the Aequinoctial, 163, 164  
Captain Row, a Commander among the Bucaniers; his forces, 2. He leaveth the Bucaniers, and why, 3    


S.  
Salvador, an Indian slave dieth, 146  
San Tiago, a River of this name, 159  
San Tiago, a slave so named, shot in the water by Captain Sharp, for plotting the destruction of the Bucaniers, 165  
Captain Sawkins setteth forth towards Darien, 1. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He leadeth the forlorn with fourscore men, 7. He goeth to pursue them that fled from Santa Maria, 12. He behaveth himself very courageously in the engagement before Panama, 29. is three times beaten off from the ship of, Captain Peralta, 30. yet at last taketh him, ibid. He is chosen in chief, 36. He took the Town of Santa Martha some years ago, 38. is complemented by the Bishop of Panama, ibid. He is killed before Puebla Nueba, 41  
Captain Sharp setteth forth towards Darien; with what design and forces, 1. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He was then very faint and weak, ibid. He was absent at the engagement before Panama, 36. He taketh in his absence a Spanish bark, ibid. Is chosen in chief at Cayboa, 42. He taketh there three several Vessels, ibid. He designeth upon Guayaquil, 45. but changeth resolution, 53. He striketh Tortoises very dexterously, 66. He is removed from his Command, Watling being chosen in his place, 120. His prophecy at Yqueque, seeing the cruelty of the Bucaniers, 128. He is chosen in chief again, 133. He maketh a bold retreat from Arica to the ship, 133. He shooteth in the water one of the slaves, who had plotted the destruction of the Bucaniers, 165. He striketh two Paxaros Ninos, 191. He discovereth and preventeth a Plot against his life, 198. He buyeth a dog for forty pieces of eight, with intention to eat him, 211. Is presented with a Mulato-boy from the rest of the Company, 210  
Slaves of the Bucaniers, they plot to massacre them at the Isle of Plate, 165  
Snakes of huge bigness, 53. Water-Snakes, 61  
Strawberries very large at la Serena, 105  
Seals, 87. Huge quantities at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116. Isle of Seals, 140  
Sea-grass, 88  
la Serena, a City so called, taken by the Bucaniers, 104. its description, 105, etc. The Town fired, 109  
Shergal (Henry) one of the Bucaniers, drowned, 178  
Shergal's River, 188  
Stephens (William) one of the Bucaniers, dyeth, 206  
Silvestre, a Negro of this name, runneth away from the Bucaniers, 154  
Silla de Paira, 78, 169  
Captain Springer, one of the Bucaniers, 29. He putteth to flight one of the Vessels of the A. midilla, ibid.  
Solango, an Isle of this name its lat, and appearance, 69, 167  
Sloth, an animal so called, taken, 53  
South-Sea, an observation made therein, 82  
Snowy hills and mountains, 188  
Sundays ordered to be kept among the Bucaniers, 121  
Scurvy much troubleth the Bucaniers, 99    


T.  
Tavaga, a little Island before Panama, where the Bucaniers lay several days, and took several prizes, 36, etc.  
Trinidad (La Santissima) or the Blessed Trinity, a ship so called taken before Panama, 32. He chooseth her for his chief Vessel, 44. They take down her Round-house, 54. And her decks, 140, etc. In this Vessel the Bucaniers came home, 212. They give her away to the poorest of the Company, ibid.  
Tocamora, a great and rich place, designed upon by the Bucaniers, 2. They quit this design for another, 3  
Tornadoes, 156, 195, 196, 209  
Tortoises, the pleasantest meat in the world, 2. Great quantities of them, and where, 66, 141  
Tropick-birds so called, 208  
Tucames, a Port of this name; its appearance at Sea, 158  
Tumbes, the first place settled in the South Seas after Panama, 76  
Thunder and lightning, very great at Cayboa, 45  
Truxillo, a rich Vessel of this place taken before Panama, 37    


V.  
Vanero, a place so called in the Gulf of Nicoya, 147  
Variation of the Needle. See Needle.  
Velas, a Port so called, its appearance at Sea, 150  
Viceroy of Lima presseth ships, and armeth them against the Bucaniers, 73. Another new Viceroy dareth not adventure up to Lima from Panama, in a ship of twenty five guns, for fear of the Bucaniers, 160. He resolveth to go under the conduct of three sail of ships, 161. He beheadeth Admiral Ponce for not destroying the Bucaniers at Gorgona. 167  
Water-key, an Island so called, 2  
Water snakes, 61, 87  
Captain Watling chosen to command in chief, 120. He was an old Privateer, ibid. He putteth Captain Cook in irons, 121. He ordereth Sundays to be kept, ibid. is daunted at the sight of three Spanish men of war, 123. His cruelty at Yqueque, 128. He is slain at Arica, 132  
Whales, 53. a sign of land, 88, 192, 199  
William, a Mosquito-Indian left behind at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 122. He is found there, and taken prisoner by the Spaniards, 159  
Winds very inconstant in some parts of the South-Sea, 47  
Old Wives, a sort of fish so called, 47  
Woman, one very beautiful taken in the Rosario, 163    


Y.  
Yqueque, an Island of this name: some account thereof, 127 etc. Customs of the inhabitants, ibid.    


Z.  
Zamblas', certain Islands so called: whereabouts they lie: habit of the Indians of those Isles: their women fairer than the fairest of Europe: these can see in the dark better than in the light, 2, 3. The natives dissuade the Bucaniers from the design of Tocamora, 3. Great reins falling there, hinder ten sail of Privateers from landing, and going to the South Sea, 164    
FINIS.   

A Catalogue of BOOKS printed and sold by William Crook Bookseller, at the Sign of the Green Dragon without Temple-bar, nigh the Passage into the Temple by Devereux-Court, 1685.  

DIVINITY.  
1. BRevis Demonstratio, being the Truth of the Christian Religion, proved by Reason, 12o. price Bound 10 d.  
2. The Primitive Institution, showing the antiquity and usefulness of Catechising, together with his suitableness to heal the distempers of the Church. By L. Addison, D. D. and Dean of Litchfield. Price 1 s. 6 d.  
3. A Sermon preached at the Funeral of a sober religious man, found drowned in a Pit. In 8o. price Bound 1 s.  
4. Mr. Howel's Visitation-Sermon before the Bishop of Chichester, 4o. price 6 d.  
5. Dr. Hascard's two Sermons, the one on the Fifth of November, the other before the Lord Mayor of London, both in 4ᵒ.  
6. Mr. Manningham's two Sermons, one before the Lord Mayor, the other at St. Mary's in Oxford. In 4ᵒ.  
7. A Sermon preached at the Savoy-Church in French, and since printed in French and English, 12o. price bound 8 d.  
8. A Modest Plea for the Clergy, wherein is considered the reasons why the Clergy are so contemned and neglected. By L. A. D. D. and Dean of Litchfield. Price 1 s. 6 d.  
9 Hugo Grotius his Catechism, Greek, Latin, and English, with a Praxis of all the Greek words therein contained. In 8o. price bound 2 s.  
10. The Spirit of Prophecy, proving that Christ and his Apostles were Prophets: written by the directions of, and recommended to the Press, by the late Peter Gunning, than Lord Bishop of Ely. In 8o. price 3 s.  
11. The King-killing Doctrine of the Jesuits, in a sincere discourse to the French King: written by a Roman Catholic. In 4o. price 〈◊〉.  
12. Justifing Faith; or the Faith by which the Just do live, together with the excellency of the Common-Prayer-Book. In 8o. price bound 1 s.  
13. Mercy Triumphant, or the Kingdom of Christ enlarged beyond the narrow bounds which have been wont to be set to it. By Ed. Lane, M. A. and Rector of Sparshalt.  
14. Du Moulin's Reflections reverberated, being a full answer to the damning Doctrine of Dr. Lewis du Moulin: also, a Confutation of Edmond Hickeringill against the Ecclesiastical Courts. By E. Lane, etc. In 4ᵒ. 1 s. 6 d.  
15. A Discourse about Conscience, relating to the present Differences among us, in opposition to both extremes of Popery and Fanaticism. In 4o. price 6 d.  
16. A Thanksgiving-Sermon for the Discovery of the late Fanatic Plot Septemb. 9 1683. By John Harison, D. D. Rector of Pulborrow, 4ᵒ.  
17. An Introduction to the Sacrament: or, a short, plain, and safe way to the Communion-Table, being an Instruction for the worthy receiving the Lords Supper; Collected for, and familiarly addressed to every particular Communicant. By L. Addison, D. D. Dean of Litchfield.  
18. The Protestant Religion the safe way to Salvation: or, an Answer to a Book entitled, Mercy and Truth, or Charity maintained, by Catholics which pretend to prove the contrary; together with the Apostolical Institution of Episcopacy; as also nine Sermons on special occasions. By William Chillingworth, M. A. of Oxford, the fifth Edition; to which is now added Mr. Chillingworths' Reasons against Popery, to persuade Mr. L. to return to the Church of England. In fol. price 14 s.  
19 The Case of Resistance of Supreme Powers stated and resolved. By W. Sherlock, D. D.  
20. A Continuation and Vindication of the Defence of Dr. Stillingfleet's Unreasonableness of Separation, in Answer to Mr. Baxter and Mr. Lob, etc. with an Examination of Mr. Humphreys materials for Union. By W. Sherlork, D. D.  
21. Primitive Christianity: or, the Religion of the Ancient Christians in the first Ages of the Gospel. By W. Cave, D. D.  
22. The History of the Charter-house, (being once a Carthusian Order) setting out the Gift of Mr. Sutton in making it so famous an Hospital, with all the Laws and Institutions of it, etc. written by Mr. Heiron of the said Foundation. In 8ᵒ.  
23. Dr. Barrows two Sermons; the one at the Spittle in Easter, the other a Passion-Sermon. In 8ᵒ.  
24. The Souls Communion with her Saviour: or, the History of our Lord Jesus Christ, written by the four Evangelists: digested into Devotional Meditations; 12o. price 1 s. 6 d.  
25. Responso Valedictoria ad secundum Sandii Epistolam, etc. Per Sam. Gardiner, S. T. D. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.  
26. A Demonstration of the Divine Authority of the Law of Nature, and of the Christian Religion, in two parts, by Sam. Parker, D. D. in 4ᵒ.  
27. The Practice of Christianity, in two parts. By Dr. Sherlock. In 8o. price 5 s.  
28. A Collection of private Devotions in the practice of the ancient Church, called the hours of Prayer; taken out of the Scriptures, Fathers, etc. By Doctor Cousins late Bishop of Durham, 12o. price 2 s.  
29. Robinson's Annalium Mundi Universalium. Folio. With other sorts of Divinity Books.   

LAW.  
THe Jurisdiction of the Authority of Court-Leets, Court-Barons, Court-Marshalsea, etc. together with the most necessary learning of Tenors, and all their Incidents of Essoyns, etc. with the Return and Forms of several Original and Judicial Writs, now in use, relating to Writs of Error, Writs of false Judgement, and other Proceed of frequent use in the Courts of Westminster, by I. Kitchen of Grays-Inn Esq To which is added Brevia selecta, being a choice Collection of special Writs; the Fifth Edition, in 8o. price 7 s.  
2. Praxis Curiae Admiralitatis Angliae, Author F. Clarke. In 12ᵒ.  
3. The Reports of Sir Henry Hobart, Chief Justice of the Common-Pleas, folio, price 10 s.  
4. The second Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, containing the Exposition of the Statutes. By Sir Edw. Coke, folio, price 15 s.  
5. The third Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, concerning the Pleas of the Crown. By Sir Edw. Coke, folio, price 6 s.  
6. The fourth Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, concerning the Jurisdiction of Courts. By Sir Edw. Coke, in folio, price 10 s.  
7. The Law of charitable Uses revised, and much enlarged, with many Cases in Law, both ancient and modern; with the Readins of Sir Francis Moor upon the Statute of the 43 of Eliz. digested by G. Duke Esq folio.  
8. Officina Brevium, select and approved Forms of Judicial Writs, and other Process, with their Returns and Entries in the Court of Common-Pleas; as also special plead to Writs, fol.  
9 Young Clerks Guide, in four parts, or an exact Collection of their English Precedents, 8ᵒ.  
10. Reports of divers Cases in Law, taken by R. Brownlow and J. Goldsbrough Esquires, both Prothonotaries; with directions how to proceed in any intricate Actions, both real and personal, with an exact Table; the third Edition, in 4ᵒ.  
11. The Touchstone of Precedents, relating to Judicial proceed at Common Law, in 8ᵒ.  
12. Actions on the Case for Deeds, viz. Contracts, Assumpsits, Deceits, Nuisances, Trover, and Conversion, etc. with two Tables, by W. Sheppard Esq 8ᵒ.  
13. A Dialogue betwixt a Student and a Philosopher, about the Common Law of England, by Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury. In 8ᵒ.  
14. Several Statutes of Bankrupt, with the Judge's Resolution thereon. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.  
15. Les Reports des tres Honorable, Edw. Seigneur Littleton Baron de Mounslow, Custos de la Grand Seale d' Angleterre, & de ses Majesty pluis Honorable Privy Council, en le Courts deal Common Bank & Exchequer, en le 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, etc. ans del Reign de Roy Charles le 1  
16. The Complete Clerk, containing the best Forms of all sorts of Precedents for Conveyances and Assurances, and other Instruments now in use and practice; with forms of Bills, Plead, and Answers in Chancery, etc. whereunto now are divers Precedents that were wanting; and also some Saxon Precedents, with exposition of Words used in ancient Charters, etc. with Alphabetical Tables of the whole Contents of the Book. In 4ᵒ.  
17. The Complete Solicitor, entering Clerk and Attorney, fully instructed in the practice, methods, and Clerkship of all his Majesty's Courts of Equity and Common Law, Superior and Inferior, as well as those at Westminster, and in the City of London, as elsewhere throughout the Kingdom of England: a Collection more correct, uniform, and universally advantageous, than any Treatise heretofore extant of the same kind. In 8ᵒ.  
18. The Laws against Conventicles, written at the request of the Justices of Peace of Middlesex, by Order of the Council, by the late Sir Edmund Saunders Lord Chief Justice of England. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.  
19 The Reports of all the plead to them of the late Lord Chief Justice Sir Edm. Saunders are printing in folio in two Volumes.   
With other useful Law-Books.  

HISTORY.  
1. AN Institution of general History, or the History of the World; being a complete body thereof, in two Volumes, by W. Howel, late Chancellor of Lincoln▪ In folio.  
2. Historical Collections; being an account of the Proceed of the Four last Parliaments of Queen Elizabeth, by H. Townsend, Esq in folio.  
3. Clelia, the whole work, in five parts; written in French, now put into English, in folio.  
4. Scarron's Comical Romance; being an Historical account of a company of Stage-players, full of variety of Novels, rare Adventures, amorous Intrigues, etc. being both witty and pleasant. In folio.  
5. Popish Cruelties, being an account of the Treasons of Dr. Parry against Queen Elizabeth, with his Confession of it at his Trial, and his Denial at his Execution, folio, price 1 s.  
6. The Life of Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury, written by himself in Latin, since translated into English. In folio, price 6 d.  
7. An Historical Narration of Heresy, with an account of the Punishments thereof. By Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury. In folio, price 6 d.  
8. Megalopsichy; being a particular and exact account of the last seventeen years of Queen Elizabeth's Reign, both Military and Civil; the first written by Sir W. Monson one of the said Queen's Admirals; the second written by H. Townsend Esq a Member of her last Parliament. Wherein is a true and faithful Relation of all the expeditious attempts, designs, successes, and errors, both of the English and Spanish, in the Wars from the year 1585., to the said Queen's Death; with a full account of the eminent Speeches and Debates, etc. in the said time: To which is added, Dr. Parry's Trial in the year 1584., all written at the time of the Actions, by persons that were eminently acting therein. Folio, price bound 10 s.  
9 A Voyage into the Levant, being a relation of a Journey lately performed from England to Grand Cairo, by Sir Henry Blunt, 12o. price 1 s.  
10. A description of Candia, with an exact account of the last Siege and Surrender of it to the Turks. In 8o. price 1 s.  
11. A Discourse of the Dukedom of Modena, containing the Original, Antiquity, etc. of that Dukedom. In 4o. price 6 d.  
12. The Travels of Ulysses, how he went to Hell and came back again, etc. by Tho. Hobbs, price 1 s.  
13. The present state of London, containing the Antiquity, Fame, Walls, Rivers, Gates, Churches, Bridge, with the Customs and Infranchisements. By I. Bridal Esq price 1 s.  
14. The Wonders of the Peak in Darbyshire, commonly called the Devil's Arse of Peak. By Tho. Hobbs, 8o. price 1 s.  
15. The Life and Death of Mahomet, being the first estate of Mahometism, showing all the designs that that Impostor Mahomet had to carry on and settle the Turkish Religion; written by L. Addison D. D. price 1 s. 6 d.  
16. The Historians Guide: or, Britain's Remembrancer; being a summary account of all the Actions, Exploits, Sieges, battles, Designs, Attempts, etc. taking notice of the Year, Month, and day of the Month, all eminent Passages that have been for 80 years' last passed, price 1 s. A portable Book.  
17. The Connexion; being Collections of some principal matters in the Reign of King James, being the time that nothing of this nature is printed, being betwixt the end of Megalapsichy, or the last seventeen years of Queen Elizabeth, and the beginning of Mr. Rushworth, Heath, Nalson, Whitlock, and others, price 1 s. 6 d.  
18. The Moors ba●●●ed; being a discourse of the Government of Tangier, under the Earl of Tiviot; showing the subtlety and policies of both parties: written by Dr. Addison, who lived there many years, 4o. price 6 d.  
19 All the Works of Homer, both Illiads and Oddyses, translated out of Greek into English, by Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury, price ● s. 6 d.  
20. Considerations on the Loyalty, Religion, Manners, and Reputation of Thomas Hobbs, 8o. price bound 1 s.  
21. The Memoires and rare Adventures of Henrietta Sylvia Moliere, a great Lady in France, now living, written by herself, in six parts in French, and now translated into English, price 4 s.  
22. Tho. Hobbs Angli Malmsb. Vita, being an account of Mr. Hobbs, of the Books he wrote of the times, when, and the occasion thereof; of the Books and Authors against him, of his Conversation, Acquaintance, etc. part wrote by himself, the rest by Dr. B. in 8o. printed 1681.  
23. Behemoth, being the History of the Civil Wars of England, and the Counsels and Artifices by which they were carried on, from 1640, to 1660. printed now from his own perfect Copy, in which is many pages more than was in the former Counterfeit Edition; none of which Editions before this, had less than a thousand faults in them, whole Lines left out in a hundred places, which did extremely pervert the sense of the Author Tho. Hobbs.  
24. The Tracts of Mr. Tho. Hobbs of Malmsbury, in two Volumes in 8ᵒ. gathering nine of his Treatises together, which are also to be had single, viz. 1. His Life in Latin. 2. His Considerations on his Loyalty, Religion, etc. 3. His Art of Rhetoric, in English. 4. His Dialogue about the Common Law of England. 5. His ten Dialogues of Natural Philosophy. 6. His Civil Wars of England, the perfect Edition. 7. His Historical Narration of Heresy. 8. His Answer to Bishop Bramhab in defence of his Leviathan. 9 His seven Problems, with an Apology for his writings to the King, price bound 12 s.  
25. A New Survey of the present State of the World, newly written in French, and now translated into English, in 8ᵒ.  
26. Compendium Geographicum: or, a more exact, plain, and easy Introduction into all Geography than yet extant, after the latest Discoveries and new Alteration; very useful, especially for young Noblemen and Gentlemen; the like not printed in English. By P. chamberlain of the Inner-Temple, Gent. the second Edition with Additions, 12o. price bound 1 s.  
27. Bucaniers of America: or, a true Account of the most remarkable Assaults committed of late years upon the Coasts of the West-Indies, by the Bucaniers of Jamaica and Tortuga, both English and French, etc. Written in Dutch, Spanish, etc. and now put into English; the second Edition, with the Addition of Captain Cooks, and another Relation to it, in 4ᵒ.  
28. The present State of the Jews, wherein is contained an exact Account of their Customs, Secular and Religious; to which is annexed a summary Discourse of the Misna, Talmud, and Gemara. By L. Addison D. D. Dean of Litchfield, and Archdeacon of Coventry, 12o. price bound 1 s. 6 d.  
29. French Intrigues: or, the History of their Delusory Promises since the Pyrenaean Treaty: printed in French at Cologne, and now made English, price 1 s.   
With other Curious Histories, etc.   


A DESCRIPTION of The South Sea & Coasts of AMERICA Containing the whole Navigation and all those places at which Capt: SHARP and his companions were in the years 1680 & 1681